GRD200 (6F2S1891) 0.2 PDF

6F2S1891 (0.
2)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Multi Function Protection IED
GRD 200
(Revision 0.2)
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly
read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and C AUTION, will be f ollowed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result

indeath or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property
damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
i
6F2S1891 (0.2)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire
Do not remove a short-wire which is mounted at the terminal on the rear of the equipment
before shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand
voltage, etc., to reduce.
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled.
When disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be pu nished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba.
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
ii
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be s ome corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to
make technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
Copyright © Toshiba 2014. All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
iii
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Protection functions ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Control.............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................... 3
1.4 Hardware overview ......................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 Symbols used in logical diagrams .................................................................................................. 5
1.6 Abbreviation .................................................................................................................................... 8
1.7 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Data ID .................................................................................. 9
2 Relay application .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Overcurrent protection (OC)......................................................................................................... 11
2.1.1 Relay polarity ......................................................................................................................... 12
2.1.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic ............................................................ 16
2.1.3 Threshold value for operation ............................................................................................... 24
2.1.4 Reset Ratio.............................................................................................................................. 24
2.1.5 Miscellaneous functions......................................................................................................... 25
2.1.6 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 26
2.1.7 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 35
2.2 Earth fault protection (EF) ........................................................................................................... 38
2.2.1 Relay polarity ......................................................................................................................... 39
2.2.3 Threshold level for operation ................................................................................................ 51
2.2.4 Reset Ratio.............................................................................................................................. 51
2.2.6 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 53
2.2.7 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 54
2.2.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 58
2.3 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) ...................................................................... 59
2.3.1 Relay polarity ......................................................................................................................... 60
2.3.3 Threshold value ...................................................................................................................... 70
2.3.4 Reset Ratio.............................................................................................................................. 70
2.3.6 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 71
2.3.7 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 73
2.3.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 77
2.4 Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (OCV)....................................................................... 78
2.4.1 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 78
iv
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.4.2 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 81

2.5 Undercurrent protection (UC) ...................................................................................................... 84
2.5.1 Operation and characteristic................................................................................................. 85
2.5.3 Scheme switch ........................................................................................................................ 86
2.5.4 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 87
2.5.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 88
2.6 Thermal overload function (THM) ............................................................................................... 89
2.6.1 Thermal state determination ................................................................................................ 90
2.6.2 Thermal characteristic .......................................................................................................... 90
2.6.3 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 92
2.6.4 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 93
2.6.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 94
2.7 Broken conductor protection (BCD) ............................................................................................. 95
2.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault .................................................................... 96
2.7.2 Characteristic and setting ..................................................................................................... 97
2.7.4 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 98
2.7.5 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 99
2.7.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 100
2.8 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)......................................................................................... 101
2.8.1 CBF operation and its elements ......................................................................................... 102
2.8.2 Re-trip feature ...................................................................................................................... 102
2.8.3 Backup feature ..................................................................................................................... 103
2.8.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 104
2.8.5 Operation timing .................................................................................................................. 105
2.8.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 106
2.8.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 107
2.9 Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC) .................................................................................................... 108
2.9.1 Scheme logic and setting ..................................................................................................... 108
2.9.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 110
2.9.3 Data ID ..................................................................................................................................111
2.10 Inrush current detection function (ICD).................................................................................... 112
2.10.1 Characteristic ....................................................................................................................... 112
2.10.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 112
2.10.3 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 112
2.10.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 113
2.10.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 113
2.11 Single-end fault locator (FL) ...................................................................................................... 114
v
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.11.1 Computation principle ......................................................................................................... 115

2.11.2 Output of FL computation on screen .................................................................................. 118
2.11.3 Setting and operation .......................................................................................................... 119
2.11.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 125
2.11.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 126
2.11.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 128
2.12 Trip circuit (TRC) ........................................................................................................................ 129
2.12.1 Operation for three-pole breaker ........................................................................................ 130
2.12.2 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 130
2.12.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 134
2.13 Autoreclose function (ARC) ........................................................................................................ 135
2.13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 135
2.13.2 Three-phase auto-reclose ..................................................................................................... 135
2.13.3 Number of shots ................................................................................................................... 136
2.13.4 Issuing ARC command......................................................................................................... 137
2.13.5 Success decision of reclose operation .................................................................................. 137
2.13.6 Reclaim time (TREADY)...................................................................................................... 138
2.13.7 Test shot function ................................................................................................................. 138
2.13.8 Number of ARC shot coordinated ....................................................................................... 138
2.13.9 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 140
2.13.10 Data ID.............................................................................................................................. 141
2.14 Voltage check for auto-reclose (VCHK) ...................................................................................... 143
2.14.1 Characteristic and elements ............................................................................................... 143
2.14.2 Synchronism Scheme ........................................................................................................... 144
2.14.3 VCHK setting ....................................................................................................................... 146
2.14.4 Scheme and activation ......................................................................................................... 150
2.14.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 151
2.14.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 152
2.15 Protection common (PROT_COMMON) .................................................................................... 153
2.15.1 Decision of CB open/close status ......................................................................................... 153
2.15.2 Decision of DS open/close status ......................................................................................... 157
2.15.3 Dead line detection .............................................................................................................. 158
2.15.4 Detection of current change (OCD)..................................................................................... 160
2.15.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 161
2.15.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 162
3 Control and monitoring application .................................................................................................. 164
3.1 Local, remote and PLC control ................................................................................................... 165
3.2 Trip LED reset function (LRST) ................................................................................................. 168
3.2.1 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 169
vi
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.2.2 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 169

3.3 Mode control function (MDCTRL).............................................................................................. 170
3.3.1 State monitor of TEST-FB ................................................................................................... 170
3.3.2 Interface for IEC 61850 ....................................................................................................... 170
3.3.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 171
3.3.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 171
3.4 General Pulse Counter Function (GCNT) ................................................................................. 173
3.4.1 Measurement........................................................................................................................ 173
3.4.2 Counter correction ............................................................................................................... 174
3.4.3 Counter Renewal .................................................................................................................. 174
3.4.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 175
3.4.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 175
3.5 Common control setting .............................................................................................................. 182
3.5.1 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 182
4 Technical Description ......................................................................................................................... 183
4.1 Outline of hardware modules ..................................................................................................... 184
4.2 IED case and module slot ........................................................................................................... 186
4.2.1 1/1 Case ................................................................................................................................. 186
4.2.2 3/4 case .................................................................................................................................. 188
4.2.3 1/2 case .................................................................................................................................. 188
4.2.4 1/3 case .................................................................................................................................. 188
4.3 Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)....................................................................... 192
4.3.1 VCT in Type 31B .................................................................................................................. 193
4.3.2 VCT in Type 32B .................................................................................................................. 194
4.3.3 VCT in Type 33B .................................................................................................................. 195
4.3.4 VCT in Type 34B .................................................................................................................. 196
4.3.5 Constitution of VCT ............................................................................................................. 197
4.3.6 Setting VCT ratio ................................................................................................................. 199
4.3.7 Selection of rated current .................................................................................................... 200
4.4 Signal processing and communication module (CPU) .............................................................. 202
4.4.1 Communication modules ..................................................................................................... 203
4.4.2 Location of communication modules................................................................................... 205
4.5 Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)......................................................................................... 207
4.5.1 Binary input feature ............................................................................................................ 208
4.5.2 Binary input circuit ............................................................................................................. 209
4.5.3 Binary output feature .......................................................................................................... 217
4.5.4 Binary output circuit ........................................................................................................... 219
4.5.5 Structure of binary IO Module ............................................................................................ 225
4.5.6 Settings of binary input circuits ......................................................................................... 230
vii
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits ........................................................................................ 232

4.5.8 Settings of binary output circuits ....................................................................................... 234
4.5.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits ...................................................................................... 236
4.6 Power supply module (PWS) ...................................................................................................... 238
4.7 Human Machine Interface (HMI) .............................................................................................. 240
4.7.1 HMI Outlook......................................................................................................................... 240
4.7.2 LED indicators (#3–#26)...................................................................................................... 241
5 Engineering tool.................................................................................................................................. 244
5.1 Overview of GR-TIEMS .............................................................................................................. 245
6 PLC function ....................................................................................................................................... 246
6.1 Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................... 247
7 Recording Function ............................................................................................................................ 248
7.1 Fault Recording ........................................................................................................................... 249
7.2 Event Recording .......................................................................................................................... 250
7.3 Disturbance Recording................................................................................................................ 251
8 Metering Function .............................................................................................................................. 253
8.1 Display of current metering........................................................................................................ 254
8.2 Demand value for metering ........................................................................................................ 254
9 Automatic supervision........................................................................................................................ 255
9.1 Basic concept of supervision ....................................................................................................... 256
9.2 Relay Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 256
9.3 Circuit breaker contact monitoring............................................................................................ 257
9.4 Disconnector contact monitoring................................................................................................ 257
9.5 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring ............................................................... 257
9.6 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring ...................................................................................... 257
9.7 Failure alarms ............................................................................................................................. 258
9.8 Trip blocking ................................................................................................................................ 258
9.9 Trip circuit supervision (TCS) .................................................................................................... 259
10 Communication protocol ................................................................................................................. 263
10.1 LAN communication ................................................................................................................... 264
10.1.2 Setting list ............................................................................................................................ 271
10.1.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 273
10.2 IEC 61850 communication.......................................................................................................... 274
10.2.1 How to set 61850 communication ....................................................................................... 275
10.2.2 How to monitor 61850 communication ............................................................................... 276
10.2.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 276
11 User interface .................................................................................................................................. 277
11.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 278
11.2 HMI operation ............................................................................................................................. 282
viii
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.3 Record sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 286

11.4 Monitoring sub-menu .................................................................................................................. 293
11.5 Setting sub-menu ........................................................................................................................ 302
11.6 Information sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 317
11.7 Time sub-menu ............................................................................................................................ 319
11.8 Test sub-menu.............................................................................................................................. 327
11.9 Information sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 334
11.10 Security setting sub-menu ...................................................................................................... 336
11.11 Control sub-menu .................................................................................................................... 338
12 Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 343
13 Commissioning and Maintenance.................................................................................................. 347
13.1 Cautions ....................................................................................................................................... 349
13.2 Preparations ................................................................................................................................ 350
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function ...................................................................................... 353
Appendix 2 Case outline ...................................................................................................................... 381
Appendix 3 Typical external connection ............................................................................................. 384
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS and PICS .............................................................................................. 386
Appendix 5 Ordering ............................................................................................................................ 430
Appendix 6 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 443
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting ......................................................................................................... 454
Appendix 8 Methods of replacing modules ......................................................................................... 457
ix
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1 Introduction
1
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GRD200—Multi function protection IED—has been designed for protects and controls of low
and medium voltage system. The IED can adapt to not only distribution lines and
transmission lines but also versatile system, such as renewable energy system and railway
application system. The IED has also designed for extensive hardware and modular software
combinations. User, thus, can be provided functions flexibly; and user can obtain good
performance, high quality and high reliability. The functions, which the IED includes, are
divided into the following chunks:
Protection functions;
Control functions;
Monitoring functions;
Recording functions.
The above functions, in this instruction manual, are discussed in a row.
1.1 Protection functions

The basic protection functions used for feeder protection or backup protection of a machine,
motor or transformer, etc.—are listed below. Control functions are performed via the IED
screen but can also be executed remotely. Operation via the IED screen is performed using the
human machine interface (HMI). The user is able to set the protection functions simply and
effectively using these features.
[CBF] Circuit breaker fail protection

This function is provided to remove a fault when a circuit-breaker failure occurs; the fault is
cleared by the back-tripping of adjacent breakers.
1.2 Control
The IED provides control functions for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and
transformers. These functions, are operated via the HMI or other functions, are also available
such as automatic sequence control, interlocking operation and manual override operation.
[L/R] Remote/Local control function

When control of the object device is required, this function allows the selection of the control
command for either local or remote, (dispatch site/control centre) operation.
[LRST] Trip LED reset function

When the LED is continuously illuminated following the completion of a trip operation, it can
be turned off using LRST.
[MDCTRL] Mode control function

This function enables an interface for test function block (TSET-FB). With this interface, a
mode change command is made within the IED for the TEST-FB.
[GCNT] General pulse counter function
- 2 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
This function can observe a signal and counts the number of the pulse signal. The adjustment
of the counted number is also provided.
1.3 Monitoring and metering functions

The monitoring and metering functions, using the HMI, display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information on a PC with “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering
and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” at local and remote end both.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT.
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

Such function provides recording feature that memories any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.
1.4 Hardware overview

A human machine interface (HMI) consisting of a screen, indication lights, operation and
function keys, monitoring jacks and a USB connector are provided in the IED. The IED has
signal terminals at the rear. Input and output module circuits are provided for these signals.
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.
- LCD screen (7×21 characters), LED display, 7 function keys and operation keys
- Password protection
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
- 3 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
- 100BASE-FX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol
Module circuits and others:

- Binary inputs and binary outputs with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision
- 4 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1.5 Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID

4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name
Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range
- 5 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
- 6 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
- 7 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1.6 Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC MIMIC display panel for IED screen (Large LCD screen)
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
SAS Substation Automation System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
- 8 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1.7 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Data ID

Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for
protections, controls and communications. Function ID is the 24 bit (6 digits in hexadecimal)
unique ID representing each FB. Data ID is the logical address of the input and output data of
the FB. Data ID consists of the Function ID and the Element ID. Since Function ID is
common within the FB, Element ID will be showed to make description simple. Element ID is
10 hexadecimal and it would have the Element ID name for easy to read.
Data ID structure
Element ID
Function ID
Data type
Format 0xFFFFFF 0xXX 0xYYYYYYYYYY
Example 45A001 80 8000101C20
- 9 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2 Relay application
- 10 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1 Overcurrent protection (OC)

The phase overcurrent (OC) protection is the major protection function in GRD200 and has
both time characteristic and directional elements. The OC protection has four stages
(elements), and the various OC features can be selected using the scheme switches provided
i.e. the user can apply the four OC elements as four individual stages. The elements are
named OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4; and operate independently.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of OC features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have OC. To determine whether OC and
its features are implemented in the IED, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order
number at the “G&T position” referring to the comparison table below. For more information,
see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Section Ordering No. at “G&T” 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C
2.1.1 Non-directional ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
2.1.1 Directional NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
2.1.5 Blocking OC by VTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
- 11 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1.1 Relay polarity

The user can choose either non-directional OC or directional OC for each OC stage (OC1 to
OC4). In addition, the user can further select between the forward or reverse direction for
each of the directional OC elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional OC

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC is a circle that has a center at the origin, as
shown in Figure 2.1-1. The boundary of the circle is the threshold value of the non-directional
OC and the hatched area shows the area of operation of the non-directional OC element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional OC element; i.e
the user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OC element for stage 1 using
setting [OC1]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 2.1-1 Characteristic of non-directional OC1; each phase-current is

applied using each OC1—OC1-A, OC1-B and OC1-C.
(ii) Characteristic of directional-OC element in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 2.1-2, the characteristic of the directional-OC elements in the forward
direction is a semi-circle based upon the zero torque line; the hatched area shows the
operating region of a directional-OC element.
- 12 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Non-operation (No trip) zone
Reference voltage or
θ Polarizing voltage (Vpol)
Operation (Trip) zone
Figure 2.1-2 Characteristic of the directional-OC element in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity and the
maximum torque line. The half plane represents the zone of operation bordered on
one side by the zero torque line, (non-operating) line and extending in the direction
that contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
A reference signal, that is, a polarization signal is required by the directional OC

element, the reference signal is derived from a phase-to-phase voltage: for example, the
directional OC element for phase-A (OC-A) uses the phase-B-to-phase-C voltage rotated by
90° (VBC∠90°) in the leading direction, this reference signal is illustrated in Figure 2.1-3. The
direction of the current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (IA), is
determined from the angle measured for IA against VBC∠90°. The purpose of using VBC in the
90° leading position is so that the reference voltage (VBC∠90°) takes the same direction as the
phase-A voltage (VA) because the directional-sensing element requires a reference quantity
that is reasonably constant against which the current in the protected circuit can be compared.
As a result, when a fault occurs, the fault current IA will lag VBC∠90°. Similarly, for the
phase-B directional OC element (OC-B) where the object current is (IB) the reference voltage
(VCA∠90°) is adopted. The phase-C directional element (OC-C) uses the same approach as the
OC-A and OC-B elements. Table 2.1-2 shows the relationship between each current and its
respective reference voltage.
- 13 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
VBC∠90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
Figure 2.1-3 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC∠90°)
Table 2.1-2 Directional polarizing signal

Directional Object current Reference voltage
OC-A IA VBC∠90°
OC-B IB VCA∠90°
OC-C IC VAB∠90°
For a close-in three-phase fault, the three reference voltages VBC∠90°, VCA∠90° and
VAB∠90° may fall below the minimum threshold voltage for the directional OC element. In
order to cover this case, a voltage memory function is used to provide a polarizing signal. The
polarizing signals are provided during three-phase faults so that the OC element is able to
determine the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines
its output based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in
accordance with Figure 2.1-4.
Phase difference calculation

|V|•|I|cos(θ−ϕ) ≥0 &
≥1 Output of
directional element
Amplitude calculation F/F &
1 1
|l|≥ OC pickup current
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol|≥ Set voltage (OV−Vpol)
Figure 2.1-4 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory
- 14 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
For instance, assume that a single phase is connected to a heavy load, and the other
phases are not connected to heavy loads; that is, the current ratios of each of the three-phases
are reflected as 2:1:1. The user can program the directional OC element such that OC will
send a trip signal only when the fault current detected is in the same direction among two
phases or more of the three-phases.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OC element, provide the
settings for the directional OC element: for example, the user can set the threshold value of
the OC at stage 1 with setting [OC1] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OC1-Angle] with the value of θ
set in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.1-5 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic set
with θ.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 2.1-5 Examples of sensing angle (θ)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the
scheme switch, as well as the setting of the directional OC element in the forward direction,
provides the setting of the directional OC element in the reverse direction: for example,
Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC on stage 1 is
considered.
- 15 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic

The OC element monitors the currents and when one of the currents cross the threshold
of operation, the OC element will operate within a period that is defined by the time
characteristic feature. The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either
dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay or independent (definite) time characteristic
delay. The operate time of the dependent time characteristic delay depends upon the level of
the energizing current, and the operate time in the definite time characteristic delay is a
constant.
The OC element reset time delay characteristic will be either dependent time reset or
definite time reset.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element
by setting a scheme switch that will be explained later in this section.
(i) Operation principle

(i)-1 Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)
The inverse time OC element has an inverse time feature for both operation and resetting; for
resetting, both definite time and dependent time resetting are available.
With inverse time operation, provided that the fault current has the magnitude required
to enable the determination of the location of the fault and provided that the fluctuation in the
impedance of the power source does not affect the correct determination, an inverse time OC
function provides an effective protection. With regard to the inverse time characteristic, for
example, the function can provide a fast trip for close-in faults, but will enable a delayed trip
for remote faults. The characteristic curve of the inverse time element can be selected from
among 10 characteristic curves† in conformance with IEC, IEEE, US, and UK standards.
†Note: A user-defined ‘Original’ curve can also be applied in addition to the 10 predefined
characteristics provided.
With dependent time resetting selected, if during the resetting period the energizing
current exceeds the threshold current of the OC element, then the OC element will pick-up.
The OC element will reset later in a period determined by the characteristics of dependent
time resetting. In other words, the user can choose the behavior of the OC element for either
faults that are repetitive intermittent or faults that occur in rapid succession. The
characteristic for dependent time resetting is selectable from five dependent time
characteristics in conformance with IEEE and US standards.
- 16 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
When definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the inverse time OC
selection and the reset time set to zero (instantaneous), no intentional delay is added for the
resetting: that is, when the energizing current falls below the reset threshold of the OC
element, the OC element returns to its reset condition. If a value is set to the reset time in
seconds, the resetting of the OC element is delayed by the reset time.
(i)-2 Definite time delay (independent time characteristic)

In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal relative to the location of the
fault, definite time overcurrent protection is usually applied. Because the fault current does
not change greatly with respect to fault position the previous advantages described with
regard to the inverse time function are not applicable. Therefore, the definite time OC
element is used instead of the inverse time OC element. The definite time OC element has a
fixed operating time regardless of the magnitude of the fault current.
The operating time of the definite time OC element is set depending on the distance
from the power source and should be set shorter for relays furthest from the power source.
Definite time OC protection provides selectivity dependent on the difference between relay
operating times. It is limited to use in networks with a power source at one side only i.e. in
radial networks. The threshold values can be set identically at each terminal, but preferably,
the threshold value is reduced, little-by-little to provide a margin in terms of the current
sensitivity of the OC element. Moreover, a higher sensitivity of threshold current is required
for a protective relay that is located remote from the power source, that is, the threshold of the
definite time OC element is required to be lower than the ordinary threshold.
The operate time of the definite time OC element is constant irrespective of the
magnitude of the fault current and the threshold level of operation of the definite time OC
element with an on-delay timer provides a selective protection. As a result, the circuit breaker
(CB) at the remote terminal far from the power source can be tripped in the shortest time. The
on-delay timer, which generates a delay in starting the operation of the OC element, provides
a time grading margin (Tc); Tc is discussed later.
Definite time resetting as well as the on-delay starting setting of the definite time OC
element is provided. The operate time for the on-delay timer for starting and for the resetting
time is set using the OC element settings.
(ii) Independent time characteristic (definite time delay)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic OC element will be a constant time
and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is also set to a constant time. The
user can set the operate time and reset time using a setting switch; descriptions of how to
- 17 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
apply these settings are provided in sections (vi) and (vii).
(iii) Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic OC element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time from a preset curve.
Ten characteristic curves are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US
and UK standard characteristic curves and one original (user programmable) characteristic
curve for which the user can set the equation parameters. The dependent time characteristic
curve equation and parameters will be explained in section (iv).
The reset time of the dependent time delay OC element is user selectable; the reset time
options are dependent time reset characteristics or definite time reset characteristic. For
dependent time reset, the user can choose the reset time for the preset characteristic from six
characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-installed characteristic curves and
one user original characteristic curve where the user can set the equation parameters. The
dependent time reset characteristic curve equation and parameters will be explained in
section (vi). The definite time reset characteristic ones will be explained in section (vii).
(iv) Operate time of dependent time characteristic

The operate time of the dependent time characteristics are defined by Equation (2.1-1).
(ref. IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × �� α � + 𝑐𝑐� (2.1-1)
�𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 2.1-3. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage. Figure 2.1-6 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one of the following scheme switches to [OC1-Type]. The scheme switches are
“IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC
Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately
Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO8”
- 18 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse and “Original” for
user-programmable characteristic.
A time multiplier (TMS) setting is required for the inverse time delay and the value of
TMS can be set for the required operate time. The value of TMS is set for a characteristic: for
example, the user can set TMS in the OC1 element according to the IEC standard using the
scheme switch [OC1-TMS-IEC]; the default value for the TMS is 1.00. The other TMSs for the
OC1 element are also set using the scheme switches [OC1-TMS-UK], [OC1-TMS-IEEE],
[OC1-TMS-US] and [OC1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.1-3 Constants for dependent operate time characteristics

Curve type Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
- 19 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 2.1-6 Inverse Definite Mean Time (IDMT) Characteristics
(v) Operate time of independent time characteristic

The operate time of the independent time characteristic is a constant.
(v)-1 Time characteristic

The user should set scheme switches [OC1-Type] DT (Definite Time) to select the independent
time characteristic. The value of the required operate time is set using the setting TOC1 in
the range 0.00–300.00s.
(v)-2 Instantaneous activation

The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting the independent
time setting to zero as described above.
(vi) Reset time for dependent time characteristic

The reset time of the dependent time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US
standard and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic. For example, the
user should set scheme switch [OC1-Rtype] “DEP” for OC1 stage to set the dependent time
reset characteristic†. The following equation defines the reset time for the dependent time
- 20 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
characteristic. (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
t(I) = RTMS × � β
� (2.1-2)
1 − �𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 �
𝑠𝑠
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
For example on the OC1 stage, with regard to the RTMS for the IEEE characteristic, the
user should set a value in [OC1-RTMS-IEEE]; the default value is 1.000. Similarly,
[OC1-RTMS-US] is for the US standard characteristic curve and [OC1-RTMS-ORG] is for an
original (user-programmable) characteristic curve. (See Table 2.1-4 for the values of kr and β;
the characteristic curves are shown in Figure 2.1-7.)
Table 2.1-4 Constants for dependent reset time characteristics

Curve Type Curve Description kr β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
†Note:Alternatively, set scheme switch [OC*-Rtype] to “DEF” for each stage to set the
definite reset time characteristic. The definite reset time characteristic is available
for all dependent time characteristics including the IEC standard, UK standard,
IEEE standard, US standard and original (user-programmable) characteristic. The
definite time reset characteristic is also available for the independent time
characteristic.
- 21 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 2.1-7 Dependent reset time characteristics curves
Figure 2.1-8 illustrates the effect of dependent time resetting on the internal time delay
counter. An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (Is) provides an energizing
quantity for the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the
operation of the function. If the operating quantity falls below the Is setting, the function will
return to its reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (2.1-2).
- 22 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
start time disengaging time

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)
tr reset time setting

(with I=0, TMS=1)
reset time
Figure 2.1-8 Dependent reset time characteristics
(vii) Reset time for definite time (instantaneous) characteristic

The user can choose either definite time reset or instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on
reset) for all OC characteristics.
(vii)-1 Reset time characteristic

The reset time for the definite time characteristic is available for all OC characteristics
whether it is a dependent time or independent time characteristic. The user is able to set
scheme switch [OC1-Rtype] DEF for OC1 stage to set the definite time reset characteristic.
Then, set an intentional delay reset time of [TOC1R] in seconds for the OC1 stage.
(vii)-2 Instantaneous reset operation

The reset time for instantaneous reset is a case of no intentional delay on reset within definite
time reset. The user should set the delay time value to 0.00.
(viii) Summary of OC operation

Table 2.1-5 shows the summary of OC operation.
- 23 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 2.1-5 Operation type and standard board (A tick shows a selectable function)
IEC IEEE US Original
Setting DT UK-LTI
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 ORG
DT ✓
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
Characteristics for operation
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
ORG ✓
DT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Characteristics for resetting
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
ORG ✓
2.1.3 Threshold value for operation

The value of threshold current at which the OC element will pick-up is configured by settings;
for example, a setting [OC1-DT] is provided for the OC element in the independent time
characteristic for stage 1. On the other hand, a setting [OC1-IDMT] is provided in the
dependent time characteristic. Other settings are also provided for the other stages.
Note that the settings of the threshold levels have distinct values in the respective OC
elements and should consider an input rating selectable as having either a 1A rating or a 5A
rating. The input rating is discussed separately. (See Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module).
2.1.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
the ratio for the OC1 element is set using the setting [OC1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the
other OC elements are also provided.
- 24 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1.5 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Trip mode
Every OC element has a selectable tripping mode; the mode is selected using a scheme switch.
For the OC1 element, for example, a scheme switch [OC1-OPMD] is provided. When a trip is
required for all faults that are detected, 3POR (a fault in one or more phases occurs) is set for
the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD]. On the other hand, when a trip is only required for faults
that occur in two or more phases, 2OUTOF3 (a fault in two or more phases occurs) is set for
the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD].
Table 2.1-6 Fault type and tripping mode
Fault type Setting [OC1-OPMD]
Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C 3POR 2OUTOF3
– – – ✓ No trip
– X – ✓ No trip
– – X ✓ No trip
X X – ✓ ✓
– X X ✓ ✓
X X X ✓ ✓
X X X ✓ ✓
Note: A tick (✓) indicates that a trip is issued when faults are detected.
A mark (X) indicates the occurrence of a fault on a particular phase. A mark
shown thus (–) indicates that no fault has occurred on that particular phase.
(ii) Harmonic detection

The operation of each OC element can be blocked using a scheme switch, if the relay
detects a harmonic caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a
transformer is energized. For example, for the OC1 element, the scheme switch
[OC1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block-3P is set when the user wishes to block all
three-phases of the OC1 element when the harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush
occurs. Alternatively, Block-PerP is set if single phase blocking is required. Non is set for
the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] as the default setting.
(iii) Blocking OC by VTF

The operation of the OC element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch
[OC1-VTFBlk] to block the operation of the OC1 element during a VTF condition. Non is
set for the scheme switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iv) OC operation for auto-reclose

The OC element activates the auto-reclose (ARC) function. However, if for example ARC
- 25 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
is not required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the
scheme switch [OC1-ARCBlk] as a default.
(v) Signal of OC trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm
for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor] for
the normal trip operation.
2.1.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for both the non-directional and the directional OC1 element is illustrated in
Figure 2.1-9 and Figure 2.1-10. Each phase of the OC1 element indicates when a pick-up
current has exceeded a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is
discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
- 26 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8100011B60
≥1 OC1-OR
8100011B61
≥1 OC1PU-OR
8000011C20 TOC1
& & t 0 8100011B62
A 8100011C21
≥1 OC1-OPT-A
OC1 B 8200011C22 & &
t 0
8100011B63
C ≥1 OC1-OPT-B
& &
t 0
8200011B64
≥1 OC1-OPT-C
0.00–300.00s
8000011C24
≥1
& & &
OC1 A 8100011C25
B 8200011C26 ≥1
PU & & &
C
& ≥1 &
&
OC1_TYPE DT
ICD-A IEC-NI
ICD-B IEC-VI
ICD-C
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI
OC1-EN On
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
ORIGINAL
VTF_DETECT
&
OC1-VTFBlk
Block
≥1
800001EBB4 OC1_BLOCK
800001EBB0 OC1_INST_OP
Figure 2.1-9 Scheme logic for the OC1 (1)
- 27 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
OC1-OPT-A
& OC1-OPT-AR
OC1-OPT-B
& OC1-OPT-BR
OC1-OPT-C
& OC1-OPT-CR
≥1
&
&
8000011B68
& ≥1 ≥1 OC1-OPT
&
&
& OC1-OPT-TRIP
3POR
OC1-OPMD & OC1-OPT-ALARM
2OUTOF3
TRIP OC1-ARC-BLOCK
OC1-USEFOR &
ALARM
OC1-ARCBLK BLOCK
Figure 2.1-10 Scheme logic for the OC1 (2)
- 28 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1.7 Setting
Setting of OC (Function ID: 440001)
Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC1 OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off
OC1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - OC1 directional characteristic NonDir
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC1 directional characteristic angle 45

DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC1-Type - OC1 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.00 5.00
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.00 5.00
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for UK inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier for US inverse curve 1.000
OC1 time multiplier for user-defined
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
‘Original’ inverse curve
OC1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type DEF
TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier for
OC1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier for US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-2fBlk Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - OC1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
OC1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OC1 operation block by VTF Non
OC1-OPMD 3POR / 2OUTOF3 - OC1 operation mode 3POR
OC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OC1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OC1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by OC1 Block

Original
- 29 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
user-defined ‘Original’ inverse curve
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user-defined ‘original’ curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Auto-reclose block by OC2 Block

Original
OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
- 30 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating

Original
OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OC4-ARCBlk Non / Block - Auto-reclose block by OC4 Block
Setting of OC(Function ID: 440001)
Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes

its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
- 31 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Original
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
OC1 time multiplier of Original inverse
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
OC1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of
OC1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
- 32 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OC3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
- 33 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating

Original
OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OC4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
- 34 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.1.8 Data ID
 Signal monitoring points
OC(Function ID: 440001)
Element ID Name Description
8000011C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B68 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8A00031C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00031C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00031B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00041C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00041C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00041C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00041C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00041C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
- 35 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

8C00041B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00041B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00041B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
 Signal monitoring point

8A00031C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00031C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00031B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
- 36 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

8C00041C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00041C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00041C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00041C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00041C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00041B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00041B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00041B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
 Connection point on PLC logic

800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
- 37 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.2 Earth fault protection (EF)

The earth fault protection (EF) function has four elements; each element can have either a
directional characteristic or non-directional characteristic.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of EF features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have the EF function. To determine
whether the EF function and its features are implemented in the IED, locate the IED ordering
number; and check the order number at “G&T position” referring to the comparison table
below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
2.2.4 Blocking EF by VTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
2.2.4 Blocking EF by CTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
- 38 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

The user can choose either non-directional EF or directional EF for each stage (EF1 to EF4).
In addition, the user can further select between the forward or direction for each of eth
directional EF elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of a non-directional EF

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF function is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 2.2-1. The boundary of the circle is the threshold value of the
non-directional EF element and the hatched area shows the area of operation of the
non-directional EF.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional EF element. For
example, the user can set the threshold value of the non-directional EF element for stage1
using setting [EF1]. NonDir is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
3I0
Stage1
0 I
Figure 2.2-1 Characteristic of non-dir EF1
(ii) Characteristic of directional-EF in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 2.2-2, the characteristic of the directional-EF elements in the forward
direction is a semi-circle based upon the zero torque line; the hatched area shows the
operating region of the directional-EF element.
- 39 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
θ Polarizing voltage (−3Vo)
Figure 2.2-2 Characteristic of the directional-EF element in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity and the
maximum torque line. The half plane represents the zone of operation bordered on
one side by the zero torque line; (non-operating) and extending in the direction that
contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional EF element, provide the
settings for the directional EF element: for example, the user can set the threshold value (IEF)
for stage 1 with setting [EF1] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir]. Setting
of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [EF1-Angle] with the value of θ set in the
range of 0–180°. Figure 2.2-3 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic set using θ.
The operation of the EF element is based upon the following equation.

3𝐼𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐼𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (2.2-1)
3𝐼𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.2-2)
3𝑉𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸_𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 (2.2-3)
where
3Io = residual current
3Vo = residual voltage
−3Vo = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF element ([EF1] and the others)
- 40 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([EF-Vpol])
Note: In the case of an internal fault, the phase angle is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system, in a directly-earthed system this value is
in the range of approximately 50° to 90°. The sensing angle θ of the EF element can
be set between 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain
directionality can be set from 0.5 to 100.0 V.
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo −3Vo
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
(iii) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the
scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional EF element in the
forward direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction:
for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF
element for stage 1 is considered.
- 41 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

The EF element monitors the currents and when one of the currents cross the threshold of
operation, the EF element will operate within a period that is defined by the time
characteristic feature. The user can choose the EF operate time delay characteristics, from
either dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay or independent (definite) time
characteristic delay. The operate time of the dependent time characteristic delay depends
upon the level of the energizing current, and the operate time in the definite time
characteristic delay is a constant.
The EF element reset time delay characteristic can be either dependent time reset or
definite time reset.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EF
element by setting a scheme switch that will be explained later in this section.
(i) Operation principle

(i)-1 Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)
The inverse time EF element has an inverse time feature for both operation; for resetting both
definite time and dependent are available.
For inverse time operation, provided that the fault current is of sufficient magnitude to
enable determination of the fault location and provided that the variation in the impedance of
the power source does not affect correct determination, an inverse time EF function provides
an effective protection. Using the inverse time characteristic, for example, the function can
provide fast tripping for close-in faults, but will enable delayed tripping for remote faults thus
enabling the desired coordination and discrimination with downstream relays. The
characteristic curve of the inverse time element can be chosen from among the 10
characteristic curves available, which conform with the IEC, IEEE, US, and UK standard
curves.
With dependent time resetting selected, if during the resetting period the energizing
current exceeds the threshold current of the EF element, then the EF element will pick-up.
The EF element will reset later in a period determined by the characteristic of the dependent
time resetting. In other words, the user can choose the behavior of the EF element for either
faults that are repetitive, intermittent or faults that occur in rapid succession. The
characteristic for dependent time resetting is selectable from five dependent time
characteristics in conformance with the IEEE and US standard curves.
When definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the inverse time EF
- 42 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
selection, and the reset time is set to zero (instantaneous), no intentional delay is added for
the resetting: that is, when the energizing current falls below the reset threshold of the EF
element, the EF element returns to its reset condition. If a value is set to the reset time in
seconds, the resetting of the EF element is delayed by the reset time.
(i)-2 Definite time delay (independent time characteristic)

In a system in which the magnitude of the fault current does not vary a great deal relative to
the location of the fault, definite time overcurrent protection is usually applied. Because the
fault current does not change greatly with respect to fault position the previous advantages
described with regard to the inverse time function are not applicable. Therefore, the definite
time EF element is used instead of the inverse time EF element. The definite time EF element
has a fixed operating time regardless of the magnitude of the fault current.
The operating time of the definite time EF element is set depending on the distance from
the power source and should be set shorter for relays furthest from the power source. Definite
time EF protection provides selectivity dependent on the difference between relay operating
times. It is limited to use in networks with a power source at one side only i.e. in radial
networks. The threshold values can be set identically at each terminal, but preferably, the
threshold value is reduced, little-by-little to provide a margin in terms of the current
sensitivity of the EF element. Moreover, a higher sensitivity of threshold current is required
for a protective relay that is located remote from the power source, that is, the threshold of the
definite time EF element is required to be lower than the ordinary threshold.
The operate time of the definite time EF is constant irrespective of the magnitude of the
fault current, and the threshold level of operation of the definite time EF element with an
on-delay timer provides a selective protection. As a result, the CB at remote terminal far from
the power source can be tripped in the shortest time. The on-delay timer, which generates a
delay in starting the operation of the EF element, provides a time grading margin (Tc), Tc is
discussed later in a subsequent section.
Definite time resetting as well as the on-delay starting of the definite time EF element is
provided. The operate time for starting and for the resetting time is set with the EF element
settings.
(ii) Independent time characteristic (definite time delay)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic EF element will be a constant time
and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is also set to a constant time. The
user can set the operate time and reset time using a setting switch; descriptions of how to
apply these settings are provided later.
- 43 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic EF element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can choose the operate time from a preset curve. Ten
characteristic curves are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and
UK standard characteristic curves and one original (user-programmable) characteristic curve
for which the user can set the equation parameters. The characteristic curve equation and
parameters will be explained later.
The reset time of the dependent time delay EF element is user selectable; the reset time
options are dependent time reset characteristics or definite time reset characteristic. For
dependent time reset, the user can choose the reset time for the preset characteristic from six
characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-installed characteristic curves and
one user original characteristic carver where the user can set the equation parameters. The
characteristic curve equation and parameters for the dependent time reset and the definite
time reset will be explained later.
(iv) Operate time of dependent time characteristic

The dependent time characteristics defined by Equation (2.2-4) is in accordance with IEC
60255-151:
k
𝑡𝑡(𝐼𝐼) = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × �� α � + c� (2.2-4)
�I�I � − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 2.2-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage. Figure 2.2-4 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one of the following scheme switches to [EF1-Type]. The scheme switches are
“IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse characteristic, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE very inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE extremely inverse, “IEC-NI” for IEC normal inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC very
inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC extremely inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse,
“US-CO8” for US CO8 inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK long time inverse and “Original” for
user-programmable characteristic.
- 44 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
A time multiplier (TMS) setting is required for the inverse time delay and the value of
TMS can be set for required operate time. The value of TMS is set for a characteristic: for
example, the user can set TMS in the EF1 element according to the IEC standard using the
scheme switch [EF1-TMS-IEC]; the default value of the TMS is 1.00. The other TMSs for the
EF1 element are also provided with scheme switches [EF1-TMS-UK], [EF1-TMS-IEEE],
[EF1-TMS-US] and [EF1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.2-2 Specification of dependent time characteristic curves

(IEC 60255-151)
- 45 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 2.2-4 IDMT Characteristics
(v) Operate time of independent time characteristic

In the definite time delay characteristic, the EF element operates with an intentional time
delay, and is used for coordination with other protective relays. The intentional delay time is
applied so that operation will not occur for the largest transient or short time current
interruption that can be tolerated by the system.
(v)-1 Time characteristic

The user should set the scheme switch [EF1-Type] DT (Definite time) to select the
independent characteristic. The value of the required operate time is set using the setting
[TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
(v)-2 Instantaneous activation

The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting the independent
time setting to zero as described above.
(vi) Reset time for dependent time characteristic

The reset time of the dependent time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US
standard and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic. For example, the
- 46 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
user should set scheme switch [EF1-Rtype] “DEP” for EF1 stage to set the dependent time
reset characteristic†. The following equation defined the reset time for the dependent time
characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 × � β
� (2.2-2)
I
1 − � �I �
s
where:
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
β = constants defining curve.
For example on the EF1 stage, with regard to the RTMS for the IEEE characteristic, the
user should set a value in [EF1-RTMS-IEEE]; the default value is 1.000. Similarly,
[EF1-RTMS-US] is for the US standard characteristic curve and [EF1-RTMS-ORG] is for an
original (user-programmable) characteristic curve.
Therefore, for example, when an IEEE standard curve is applied to the inverse time EF1
element, DEP is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Rtype] because dependent time resetting is
required for the EF1 element.
A time multiplier (RTMS) setting is required for dependent time resetting, and a scheme
switch [EF1-RTMS-IEEE] is used. As a default, 1.000 is set for the scheme switch
(RTMS=1.000). Other RTMS scheme switches are also provided: [EF1-RTMS-US] and
[EF1-RTMS-ORG].
- 47 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 2.2-3 Constants for dependent reset time characteristics

Curve Type Curve Description kr β
IEC 60255-151 sec
†Note:Alternatively, set scheme switch [EF*-Rtype] to “DEF” for each stage to set the
definite reset time characteristic. The definite reset time characteristic is available
for all dependent time characteristics including the IEC standard, UK standard,
IEEE standard, US standard and original (user-programmable) characteristic. The
definite time reset characteristic is also available for the independent time
characteristic.
- 48 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 2.2-5 Dependent reset time characteristics curves
Figure 2.2-6 illustrates the effect of dependent time resetting on the internal time delay
counter. An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (IS), is the energizing quantity
for the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the operation of the
function, and if the operating quantity falls below the value of GS, the function will return to
its reset state after time t(I). Time t(I) is calculated using equation (2.2-2).
- 49 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
reset time
Figure 2.2-6 Dependent reset time characteristics
(vii) Reset time for definite time (instantaneous) characteristic

The user can choose either definite time reset or instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on
reset) for all EF operations.
(vii)-1 Reset time characteristic

The reset time for the definite time characteristic is available for all EF characteristics
whether it is a dependent time or independent time characteristic. The user is able to set
scheme switch [EF1-Rtype] DEF for EF1 stage to set the definite reset time characteristic.
Then, set an intentional delay reset time of [TEF1R] in seconds for the EF1 stage.
(vii)-2 Instantaneous reset

Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing (ARC†) schemes for
faults that occur in rapid succession to ensure correct grading between relays at various
points in the scheme. The reset time for instantaneous reset is a case of no intentional delay
on reset within definite time reset. The user should set the delay time value to 0.00.
†Note: For ARC, see chapter Relay application: Autoreclose.
(viii) Summary of EF operation

Table 2.2-4 shows a summary for EF operation.
- 50 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 2.2-4 Operation type and the standard board (A tick represents a selectable function)
Setting DT UK-LTI
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
ORG ✓
DT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
ORG ✓
2.2.3 Threshold level for operation

The value of threshold current at which the EF (IEF) element will pick-up is configured by
settings; for example, a setting [EF1] is provided for the EF element for stage 1. Settings are
also provided for the other stages.
Note that the settings of the threshold levels have distinct values in the respective EF
elements and the input ratio of the transformer module must be selected for either a 1A or 5A
rating. The transformer module is discussed separately (See chapter Technical description:
Transformer module).
2.2.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
the ratio for the EF1 element is set using the setting [EF1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the other
EF elements are also provided.
- 51 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

(i) Harmonic detection
The operation of each EF element can be blocked using a scheme switch, if the relay detects a
harmonic caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer is
energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided, and
Block is set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the harmonic associated
with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set for the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] as the
default setting.
(ii) Blocking EF by VTF

The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-VTFBlk] to
block the operation of the EF1 element during a VTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [EF1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Blocking EF by CTF

The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the current transformer failure (CTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-CTFBlk] to
block the operation of the EF1 element during a CTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [EF1-CTFBlk] as a default.
(iv) EF operation for autoreclose

The EF element activates the auto-reclose (ARC) function. However, if for example ARC is not
required, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-ARCBlk]. Block is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-ARCBlk] as a default.
(v) Signal of EF trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, Alarm is set for
the scheme switch [EF1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [EF1-UseFor] for the
normal trip operation.
- 52 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.2.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for both the non-directional and the directional EF1 element is illustrated in
Figure 2.2-7. The EF1 signal is generated when the pickup current exceeds a threshold, and
then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is discussed separately (See chapter Relay
application: Trip circuit)
8000011C23
TEF1
EF1 0 8000011B60
& &
t
EF1-OPT
8000011C27 0.00-300.00s ≥1
EF1 PU
& ≥1 &
&
ICD-OR
EF1_TYPE DT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
EF1-EN ON IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
VTF_DETECT
EF1-VTFBLK & IEEE-VI

BLOCK
IEEE-EI
CTF_DETECT ≥1
US-C02
EF1-CTFBLK &
BLOCK US-C08
ORIGINAL
800001EBBO EF1_BLOCK
800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP
Figure 2.2-7 Scheme logic for the EF1 (1)
EF1-OPT EF1-OPT
& EF1-OPT-TRIP
TRIP
EF1-USEFOR ALARM EF1-OPT-ALARM
&
EF1-ARCBLK BLOCK
& EF1-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.2-8 Scheme logic for the EF1 (2)
- 53 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.2.7 Setting
Setting of EF (Function ID: 441001)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Setting item Units Contents
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
The polarizing voltage level of EF
Common EF-Vpol 0.5 - 100.0 V 3.0
directional characteristic
EF1 EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off
EF1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - EF1 directional characteristic NonDir
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 deg EF1 directional characteristic angle 45

EF1-Type - EF1 delay type DT
Original
EF1-DT 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A EF1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.30 1.50
EF1-IDMT 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A EF1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.30 1.50
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
EF1 time multiplier for IEC inverse
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1 time multiplier for UK inverse
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1 time multiplier for IEEE inverse
EF1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier for US inverse curve 1.000
EF1 time multiplier for Original inverse
EF1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF1-Rtype DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type DEF
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 definite time reset delay 0.00
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier for
EF1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
user-defined ‘original’ inverse curve
EF1 user-defined ‘original’ curve
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF1 user-defined original curve
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF1 user-defined original curve
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
EF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by VTF Non
EF1-CTFBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by CTF Non
EF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - EF1 used for trip or alarm Trip
EF1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Auto-reclose block by EF1 Block
- 54 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Original
EF2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
‘original inverse curve
EF2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000

Original
- 55 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
EF3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
EF3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient

Original
EF4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
- 56 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
EF4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
EF4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
EF4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
EF4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
EF4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
EF4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000
coefficient
- 57 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.2.8 Data ID
EF(Function ID: 441001)
8000011C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8000011C27 EF1PU EF1 relay operation level pick up
8000011B60 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated

EF(Function ID: 440001)
800001EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instantaneous operation command
- 58 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.3 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)

The function of negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) provides four elements, and
each element can take either a directional characteristics or non–directional characteristics.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of OCN features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have OCN. To know whether OCN and
its features are implemented or not in the IED, find the IED ordering number; and check the
order number at “G&T position” referring to the comparison table below. For more
information, see Appendix: Ordering.
2.3.5 Blocking OCN by VTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
2.3.5 Blocking OCN by CTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
✓: Applicable N/A: Not applicable
- 59 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

For relay polarity, each stage—OCN1 to OCN4—can choose either non-directional OCN or
directional OCN. The directional type of OCN consists of forward type and reverse type.
(i) Characteristic of a non-directional OCN

The characteristic of the non-directional type (non-directional OCN) is shown as a circle that
has a center at the origin, as shown in Figure 2.3-1. The circle represents the threshold value
of the non-directional OCN and the hatched area represents the operation area of the
non-directional OCN.
The set of the non-directional OCN is configured by a setting and a scheme switch; e.g.
the threshold value of the non-directional OCN stage 1 is provided by a setting [OCN1], and
scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] NonDir.
I2
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 2.3-1 Characteristic of non-directional OCN1
(ii) Characteristic of directional OCN in the forward

Based on Figure 2.3-2, the characteristic of the directional OCN (directional-OCN) in the
forward is shown with a half circle and a zero torque line; a hatched area represents the
operation of the directional-OCN.
- 60 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
θ Polarizing voltage (-V2)
I2
Figure 2.3-2 Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward

Note: A sensing angle (θ) turns out an angle of the directional OCN. The half plane
represents an operation zone that borders one side of the zero torque line.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OCN, prescribe the set of the
directional OCN: e.g., setting [OCN1] proves the threshold value (IOCN) at stage 1, and
Forward is set for scheme switch [OCN1-Dir]. The set of sensing angle (θ) is prescribed by
setting [OCN1-Angle], and the θ is taken among 0–180°. A reference signal (or polarizing
signal –V2) that is derived internally is shown in Figure 2.3-3. Figure 2.3-4 provides an
example of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ. The operation decision of OCN uses the
following equation:
𝐼𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝐼𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 (2.3-1)
𝐼𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.3-2)
𝑉𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂_𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 (2.3-3)
where
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1], [OCN2], [OCN3] and [OCN4])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN-Vpol])
- 61 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50°
to 90°. θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 180 V.
−V2
VA
V2
Figure 2.3-3 Relationship between negative sequence current and reference voltage
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
- 62 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OCN in the reverse

The reverse is a mirror image of the forward. To set the directional OCN in the reveres,
Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir].

OCN has time characteristic features which control the operation and resetting of OCN, and
the time characteristic feature has a choice either (1) inverse time delay—dependent time
characteristic or (2) definite time delay—independent time characteristic. Therefore, when a
measured current surpasses the threshold value of OCN, OCN activates its operation with a
time that controlled by the time characteristic feature. The resetting of OCN is controlled by
the time characteristic feature, as well as the activation.
1. Inverse time: The inverse time OCN has an inverse time feature of activation and
resetting that have a choice between definite time resetting and dependent
resetting.
For the inverse time activation, whenever the fault current has the
magnitude of the determination of the fault location and the fluctuation of
the impedance of power source does not affect the determination, an inverse
time OCN has an advantage being used for the protection. By the
characteristic of the invers time, e.g., a relay can signal a trip fast for
close-in fault, whereas a relay can signal a trip late for remote fault. The
characteristic curve of the inverse time has 10 characteristic curve choices
in conformity to the IEC, IEEE, US, and UK standard.
When the dependent time resetting is selected, and the energizing
current continues to exceed the threshold current of OCN within a transient
period, the function of OCN is initiated. The resetting of OCN, later, is
employed in a period determined by the characteristics of a dependent time
resetting. On the other words, an operator can select and choice the
behavior of the OCN for either faults that are repetitive intermittent or
faults that are in rapid succession. The characteristic of the dependent time
resetting has a choice among five dependent time characteristics in
conformity to the IEEE and US standard.
When the definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the
inverse time OCN selected, and the reset time is set to zero—instantaneous,
no intentional delay is added for the resetting: i.e., the energizing current
falls below the reset threshold of OCN, OCN returns to its reset condition. If
a value is set to the reset time in seconds, the resetting of OCN delays in the
reset time.
- 63 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2. Definite time: In a system in which fault current does not change greatly with the position
of the fault, the advantages of the inverse time disappears completely.
Therefore, the definite time OCN is applied instead of the inverse time OCN
and the settings of a definite time OCN are performed regardless of the
magnitude of the fault current.
For the definite time OCN, the threshold values of the definite time
OCN can be identified at relay terminals, but the threshold value being set
bit by bit is preferred in order to provide the margin of the OCN current
sensitivity. However, the high sensitivity of the threshold current is
required when a relay is placed far from the power source, i.e. the threshold
of the definite time OCN is required lower than an ordinary threshold.
The operation time of the definite time OCN is, as before, constant
irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current, and the activation of the
definite time OCN with an on-delay timer provides a selective protection. As
a result, the CB at remote terminal far from the power source can be tripped
in the shortest time. The on-delay timer, which supplies a delay for the
activation of OCN, provides a time grading margin (Tc), and the Tc is
discussed in a subsequent section.
The definite time resetting is provided as well as the activation of the
definite time OCN. The operation time for the activation and resetting time
is set with the settings of OCN.
(i) Usage of inverse characteristic for activation

The inverse time OCN provides the dependent time characteristic—the characteristic curve is
being drawn with an equation prescribed by the several standards; each OCN at a stage—the
OCN1, OCN2, OCN3, and OCN4—can use an inverse time delay independently.
For the setting of OCN1, e.g., scheme switch [OCN1-Type] is provided for the selection of
the characteristic curve, and IEEE moderately inverse (IEEE-MI) is set for scheme switch
[OCN1-Type] when IEEE-MI is required. The other characteristic curves are also provided, and
among sets of these characteristics are IEEE very inverse (IEEE-VI), IEEE extremely inverse
(IEEE-EI), IEC normal inverse (IEC-NI), IEC very inverse (IEC-VI), IEC extremely inverse
(IEC-EI), US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2), US CO8 inverse (US-CO8), and UK long time
inverse (UK-LTI). The equation of the characteristic curve is placed as setting the discussed in
a subsequent section.
An original curve (Original) is provided such that operators can program their original
curves. The programming of the original curve is discussed in a subsequent appendix.
- 64 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
A set of time multiplier (TMS) is requisite for the inverse time delay and TMS proves an
adjustable lever for an operation time. The value of TMS is placed for a setting: e.g., the
OCN1’s TMS of IEC standard is provided by scheme switch [OCN1-TMS-IEC]; the value of the
TMS turns out 1.00 as a default. The other standard’s TMSs of OCN1 are also provided with
scheme switches—OCN1-TMS-UK, OCN1-TMS-IEEE, OCN1-TMS-US and OCN1-TMS-ORG.
The dependent time characteristics defined by an equation (1) in accordance with IEC
60255-151:
𝑘𝑘
t(G) = TMS × �� α � + 𝑐𝑐� (2.3-4)
�𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.3-2, and are illustrated in Figure 2.3-5.
The details of the dependent time are also discussed in a subsequent appendix. Any one curve
can be selected for each dependent time element by the scheme switch.
Table 2.3-2 Specification of dependent time characteristic curves

(IEC 60255-151)
- 65 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 2.3-5 IDMT Characteristics
(ii) Usage of definite time delay characteristic for activation

The definite time OCN provides its activation with an intentional time delay. The
intentional delay time is applied so that the operation will not occur on the largest
transient or short time current interruption that can be tolerated by the system.
For the setting of OCN1, e.g. definite type (DT) is set for scheme switch [OCN1-Type],
and the value of a delay time is set for [TOCN1] among 0.00–300.00s.
(iii) Usage of instantaneous for activation

The instantaneous OCN provides its activation without an intentional time delay.
For the setting of OCN1, e.g. definite type (DT) is set for scheme switch [OCN1-Type],
and the 0.00 of a delay time is set for [TOCN1].
(iv) Usage of dependent time for resetting

The dependent time resetting is also provided by several curves, as well as the inverse time
OCN for the activation. However, it should be noted that among these dependent time
resetting is not IEC and UK standard, but IEEE and US standard and the programmed
original curve.
- 66 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Therefore, e.g. when IEEE standard is applied on the invers time OCN1, DEP is set for
scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype] as the dependent time resetting is required for OCN1.
The dependent time resetting also required the TMS for resetting (RTMS), and scheme
switch [OCN1-RTMS-IEEE] is used. As a default, 1.000 is placed for the scheme switch
(RTMS=1.000). Other RTMS’s scheme switches are also provided: [OCN1-RTMS-US] and
[OCN1-RTMS-ORG].
The characteristic of the dependent time resetting is complied with IEC 60255-151, and
is defined by the following equation:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑡𝑡(𝐺𝐺) = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 × � 𝑏𝑏 �
(2.3-5)
𝐼𝐼
1 − � �𝐼𝐼 �
𝑠𝑠
where
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
b = constants defining curve.
- 67 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 2.3-3 Specification of dependent time resetting characteristic curves

Curve Type Curve Description Kr b
IEC 60255-151
Figure 2.3-6 Dependent time resetting characteristics curves
Figure 2.3-7 illustrates the effect of the dependent time resetting on the internal time
delay counter. An object current (G)—the G is greater than a setting (GS) and the G turns out
an energizing quantity for the function—continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the
operation of the function, and if the operating quantity falls below the GS, the function will
- 68 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
return to its reset state after the t(G). The t(G) is calculated by the equation (2).

energizing
quantity > Gs
start (pick-up)
signal
operate signal
operate level of
the integrator
value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)

(with G=0, TMS=1)
reset time
Figure 2.3-7 Dependent time resetting characteristics
(v) Usage of definite time for resetting

The definite time resetting includes an intentional time delay. The set of the definite time
resetting is prescribed by a setting and a scheme switch, e.g. OCN1’s definite time is set
arbitrarily for [TOCN1R], and DEF is set for scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype].
The definite time resetting is applicable to entire OCN operations.
(vi) Instantaneous resetting

The instantaneous resetting is provided with an intentional delay, and e.g. the set for the
OCN1 is configured by setting [TOCN1R] and scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype]. A set of 0.00, here,
is set for [TOCN1R] and DEF is set for scheme switch [OCN1-Rtype].
The instantaneous resetting is applicable to entire OCN’s operation.
- 69 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(vii) Summarize of operation of OCN

Table 2.3-4 shows summarize of OCN operation.
Table 2.3-4 Relationships between operation type and the standard board. A tick (a check mark)
shows a selectable function.
Setting UK-LTI
DT
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
ORG ✓
DT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
2.3.3 Threshold value

The threshold current for the activation OCN is prescribed by settings; e.g. setting [OCN1] is
provided for the stage 1 of OCN. The other settings also are provided: settings [OCN2],
[OCN3] and [OCN4].
It should be noted that the sets of threshold are different among the OCN1—OCN4 and
the input ratio of a transfer module that is chosen between 1A rating and 5A rating. The
transformer module is discussed separately (See chapter Technical description)
2.3.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for activation to reset is set by a setting; e.g. the ratio of
- 70 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
OCN1 is set for [OCN1-DPR]. The other ratios for OCN2, OCN3 and OCN4 are configured
with settings [OCN2-DPR], [OCN3-DPR] and [OCN4-DPR].

(i) Harmonic detection function
Every stage of OCN can negate the operation of OCN by using a scheme switch, as a relay
detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon as the
transformer is energized. For OCN1, e.g., scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] is provided; Non is set
for scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Blocking OCN by VTF/CTF

The operation of OCN can be blocked by the function of a voltage transformer failure (VTF)
and a current transformer failure (CTF) with scheme switches. Block, e.g., is set for scheme
switch [OCN1-VTFBlk]/[OCN1-CTFBlk] if the operation of OCN1 should be removed during
the VTF/CTF. Non is set for scheme switch [OCN1-VTFBlk]/[OCN1-CTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) OCN operation for autoreclose

The OCN activates an autoreclose (ARC). However, e.g. Block is set for scheme switch
[OCN1-ARCBlk] if the operation of the ARC is not required. Block is placed for the scheme
switch [OCN1-ARCBlk] as a default.
(iv) Signal of OCN trip

The OCN, as before, activates the ARC. However, when an alarm signal substituted for the
trip signal is required, e.g. Alarm is set for scheme switch [OCN1-UseFor]. Trip is set for
scheme switch [OCN1-UseFor] for the normal trip operation.
2.3.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OCN1 is shown in Figure
2.3-8 and Figure 2.3-9. According to Figure 2.3-8, OCN1 provides the result of decision
whether a current of negative sequence exceeds a setting, and then operation signals are
issued into trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See chapter Relay application: Trip
circuit)
- 71 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8000011C23
TOCN1
OCN1 0 8000011B60
& &
t
OCN1-OPT
8000011C27 0.00-300.00s ≥1
OCN1 PU
& ≥1 &
&
ICD-OR
OCN1_TYPE DT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
OCN1-EN ON IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
VTF_DETECT
OCN1-VTFBLK & IEEE-VI

BLOCK
IEEE-EI
CTF_DETECT ≥1
US-C02
OCN1-CTFBLK &
BLOCK US-C08
ORIGINAL
800001EBBO OCN1_BLOCK
800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
Figure 2.3-8 Scheme logic of OCN1
OCN1-OPT OCN1-OPT
& OCN1-OPT-TRIP
TRIP
OCN1-USEFO ALARM OCN1-OPT-ALARM
&
OCN1-ARCBlk BLOCK
& OCN1-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.3-9 Scheme logic of OCN1 (2)
- 72 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.3.7 Setting
Setting of OCN(Function ID:443001)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
The polarizing voltage level of OCN
OCN Common OCN-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V 3.0
directional characteristic
OCN1 OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off
OCN1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - OCN1 directional characteristic NonDir
OCN1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OCN1 directional characteristic angle 45

OCN1-Type - OCN1 delay type DT
Original
OCN1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A OCN1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 / 2.00
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A OCN1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 / 2.00
OCN1-DPR 10 - 100 % OCN1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 operating delay time 1.00
OCN1 time multiplier of IEC inverse
OCN1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1 time multiplier of UK inverse
OCN1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse
OCN1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1 time multiplier of US inverse
OCN1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN1 time multiplier of Original
OCN1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OCN1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OCN1 reset delay type DEF
TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier
OCN1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of IEEE inverse curve
OCN1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of US inverse curve
OCN1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of Original inverse curve
OCN1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-2fBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by 2f-detection Non
OCN1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by VTF Non
OCN1-CTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by CTF Non
OCN1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OCN1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OCN1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose block by OCN1 Block

OCN2-Type UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - OCN2 delay type DT
- 73 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Original
OCN2 0.02 - 50.00 / 0.10 - 250.00 A OCN2 threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 / 2.00
0.02 - 5.00 / 0.10 - 25.00 A OCN2 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 / 2.00
OCN2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OCN2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of US inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
OCN3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
- 74 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OCN3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OCN3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of US inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000

Original
OCN4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OCN4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
OCN4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
of US inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
- 75 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
- 76 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.3.8 Data ID
OCN(Function ID: 443001)
8000011C23 OCN1 OCN1 relay element operated
8000011C27 OCN1PU OCN1 relay operation level pick up
8000011B60 OCN1-OPT OCN1 protection operated

OCN(Function ID: 443001)
800001EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
- 77 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.4 Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (OCV)

Voltage controlled or voltage restraint inverse overcurrent protection (OCV) is to issue a trip
command at which several types of faults occur on the lower voltage side when the fault
current may be lower than the nominal value. The user can select either the voltage controlled
OCV or the voltage restraint OCV function in addition to the normal OCV function. When
voltage controlled OCV is used and just an input voltage is lower than a setting, an OCV
element is operated. On the other hand, when voltage restraint OCV is used, the sensitivity of
OCV is proportionally adjusted by a voltage input value; the user can set the value between
20 and 100%
2.4.1 Setting
Setting of OCV (Function ID: 444001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
1 OCV1-EN Off/Controlled/Restraint OCV1 protection enable
OCV1-VTFBlk Non/Block OCV1 operation block by VTF Non
OCV1-OPMD 3POR/2OUTOF3 OCV1 operation mode 3POR
OCV1-UseFor Trip/Alarm OCV1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OCV1-ARCBlk Non/Block Autoreclose block by OCV1 Block
OCV1-Dir
NonDir/Forward/Reverse OCV1 directional characteristic NonDir
OCV1-Angle deg
0-180 OCV1 directional characteristic angle 45
OCV1-Type IEC-NI/IEC-VI/IEC-EI/UK-
LTI/IEEE-MI/IEEE-VI/IEE
OCV1 delay type IEC-NI
E-EI/US-CO2/US-CO8/
Original
OCV1-I 0.02-5 0.1-25 A OCV1 I threshold 1 5
OCV1-V 10-220 V OCV1 V threshold 70
OCV1-TMS-IEC OCV1 time multiplier of IEC inverse
0.01-50 1
curve
OCV1-TMS-UK OCV1 time multiplier of UK inverse
0.01-50 1
curve
OCV1-TMS-IEEE OCV1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse
0.01-50 1
curve
OCV1-TMS-US OCV1 time multiplier of US inverse
0.01-50 1
curve
OCV1-TMS-ORG OCV1 time multiplier of Original inverse
0.01-50 1
curve
OCV1-Rtype DEF/DEP OCV1 reset delay type DEF
TOCV1R 0-300 s OCV1 definite time reset delay 0
OCV1-RTMS-IEEE OCV1 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.01-50 1
IEEE inverse curve
OCV1-RTMS-US OCV1 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.01-50 1
US inverse curve
OCV1-RTMS-ORG OCV1 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.01-50 1
OCV1-k 0-500 OCV1 user original curve coefficient 0
OCV1-a 0-10 OCV1 user original curve coefficient 0
OCV1-c 0-10 OCV1 user original curve coefficient 0
- 78 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OCV1-kr 0-500 OCV1 user original curve coefficient 0
OCV1-b 0-10 OCV1 user original curve coefficient 0
OCV1-2fBlk Non/Block-3P/Block-PerP OCV1 operation block by 2f-detection
OCV2-Dir
OCV2-Angle 0-180 deg OCV2 directional characteristic angle 45
E-EI/US-CO2/US-CO8/
Original
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
IEEE inverse curve
0.01-50 1
US inverse curve
0.01-50 1
OCV3-Dir
OCV3-Angle deg
- 79 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
E-EI/US-CO2/US-CO8/
Original
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
IEEE inverse curve
0.01-50 1
US inverse curve
0.01-50 1
OCV4-Dir
OCV4-Angle deg
E-EI/US-CO2/US-CO8/
Original
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
curve
- 80 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Default setting
Range
value
Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
0.01-50 1
curve
0.01-50 1
IEEE inverse curve
0.01-50 1
US inverse curve
0.01-50 1
2.4.2 Data ID
OCV(Function ID: 444001)
8000011C20 OCV1-A OCV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OCV1-B OCV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OCV1-C OCV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 OCV1-OR OCV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OCV1PU-A OCV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 OCV1PU-B OCV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 OCV1PU-C OCV1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 OCV1PU-OR OCV1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000011B62 OCV1-OPT-A OCV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 OCV1-OPT-B OCV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 OCV1-OPT-C OCV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B68 OCV1-OPT OCV1 protection operated
- 81 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

8A00031C22 OCV3-C OCV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00031C26 OCV3PU-C OCV3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00031B64 OCV3-OPT-C OCV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00041C20 OCV4-A OCV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00041C21 OCV4-B OCV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00041C22 OCV4-C OCV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C24 OCV4PU-A OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00041C25 OCV4PU-B OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00041C26 OCV4PU-C OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00041B62 OCV4-OPT-A OCV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00041B63 OCV4-OPT-B OCV4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00041B64 OCV4-OPT-C OCV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011C20
8100011C21
- 82 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

8A00031C22 OCV3-C OCV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00031C26 OCV3PU-C OCV3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00031B64 OCV3-OPT-C OCV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00041C20 OCV4-A OCV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00041C21 OCV4-B OCV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00041C22 OCV4-C OCV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00041C24 OCV4PU-A OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00041C25 OCV4PU-B OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00041C26 OCV4PU-C OCV4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00041B62 OCV4-OPT-A OCV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00041B63 OCV4-OPT-B OCV4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00041B64 OCV4-OPT-C OCV4 protection operated (phase-C)

800001EBB0 OCV1_BLOCK OCV1 protection block command
- 83 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.5 Undercurrent protection (UC)

Undercurrent protection (UC) is provided per phase and is used to detect a decrease in
current caused by a loss of load. The UC protection consists of two independent stages—stage
1 (UC1) and stage 2 (UC2). Each stage is provided for all phases and employs a definite time
delay programmed.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of UC features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have the UC protection. To determine
whether the UC protection and its features are implemented in the IED or not, locate the IED
ordering number; and check the order number at “G&T position” referring to the comparison
table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
2.5.2 Blocking UC by CTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
- 84 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.5.1 Operation and characteristic

Each stage of the UC protection will operate when a current is under a threshold level, as
illustrated in Figure 2.5-1(a). The threshold levels of the UC protection are set by using
settings [UC1] or [UC2]. The operation of the UC protection, however, is blocked as the
current falls below 4 % of the CT secondary rating, below which the loss of load cannot be
distinguished from that of a trip operation performed by other protective functions. This
discrimination is introduced by another under current element (UCDO) that is set at 0.04
times rated current. The UCDO characteristic is drawn in Figure 2.5-1(b).
Threshold value
Operating zone
0.04×In
0 0 I
I
In: rated current
(a) UC1 and UC2 (b) UCDO
Figure 2.5-1 Element characteristics of UC and UCDO
A definite time delay can be programmed by applying a value of delay time using setting
[TUC1], the user can choose a value between 0 and 300s.
These features are described for the UC1 function, UC2 is exactly the same as UC1.

(i) Signal of UC trip
The UC protection will issue a trip command for the trip function, but can be used to signal an
alarm, depending upon the application to which is has been applied, when Alarm is set for
scheme switches [UC1-UseFor] or [UC2-UseFor]. In practice, Trip is set as the default setting.
(ii) Blocking UC by CTF

If the operation of the UC protection is not required when the failure of current transformer
(CTF) occurs, the user should set Block for scheme switch [UC1-CTFBlk] or
[UC2-CTFBlk].Scheme switch.
- 85 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.5.3 Scheme switch

Figure 2.5-2 shows the scheme logic for UC1. As noted earlier, the operation of UC1 is
removed when the input current falls below the rated current of 4%. A flip-flop circuit and the
UCDO element are used to remove the operation of UC1 in each phase. Scheme switch
[UC1-EN] Off is provided when the operation of UC1 is not required..
≥1 UC1-OR
8000011C20
A
S & TUC1 8014001001
UC1 B 8100011C21 1 &
& t 0 UC1-OPT-A
R &
C
S & 8114011001
8200011C22 1 & t 0
& UC1-OPT-B
R &
8214021001
S &
1 & t 0 UC1-OPT-C
& R &
UC1-EN 0.00-300.00s
A On
I>Iset B 8000011B64
C ≥1 UC1-OPT
& UC1-OPT-TRIP
A
I<0.04In B
C Trip
UC1-UseFor UC1-OPT-ALARM
&
Alarm
From CTF
CTF_DETECT
&
UC1-CTFBlk
Block ≥1 1
800001EBB0 UC1_BLOCK
≥1
UC2-OR
8400021C20
A 8400021B61
S & TUC2
UC2 B 8500021C21 1 &
& t 0 UC2-OPT-A
R &
C
S & 8500021B62
8600021C22 &
1 & t 0
R & UC2-OPT-B
8600021B63
S &
1 & t 0 UC2-OPT-C
& R &
UC2-EN On 0.00-300.00s
A
I>Iset B 8100021B64
C ≥1 UC2-OPT
&
UC2-OPT-TRIP
&
UC2-CTFBlk Trip
UC2-UseFor & UC2-OPT-ALARM
Block ≥1 1 Alarm
81002EBB0 UC2_BLOCK
Figure 2.5-2 Scheme logic of UC
- 86 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.5.4 Setting
Setting of UC(Function ID: 450001)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
UC UC1 UC1-EN Off / On - UC1 protection enable Off
UC1 0.10 - 2.00/0.50 - 10.00 A UC1 threshold 0.20 / 1.00
TUC1 0.00 - 300.00 s UC1 operating delay time 1.00
UC1-CTFBlk Non / Block - UC1 operation blocked by CTF Non
UC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - UC1 used for trip or alarm Trip
UC2 UC2-EN Off / On - UC2 protection enable Off
UC2 0.10 - 2.00/0.50 - 10.00 A UC2 threshold 0.20 / 1.00
TUC2 0.00 - 300.00 s UC2 operating delay time 1.00
UC2-CTFBlk Non / Block - UC2 operation blocked by CTF Non
UC2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - UC2 used for trip or alarm Trip
- 87 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.5.5 Data ID
UC(Function ID: 450001)
8000011C20 UC1-A UC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 UC1-B UC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 UC1-C UC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 UC1-OR UC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011B61 UC1-OPT-A UC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B62 UC1-OPT-B UC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B63 UC1-OPT-C UC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B64 UC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8400021C20 UC2-A UC2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8500021C21 UC2-B UC2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8600021C22 UC2-C UC2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8100021B60 UC2-OR UC2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021B61 UC2-OPT-A UC2 protection operated (phase-A)
8500021B62 UC2-OPT-B UC2 protection operated (phase-B)
8600021B63 UC2-OPT-C UC2 protection operated (phase-C)
8100021B64 UC2-OPT UC2 protection operated

UC(Function ID: 450001)
800001EBB0 UC1_BLOCK UC1 protection block command
810002EBB0 UC2_BLOCK UC2 protection block command
- 88 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.6 Thermal overload function (THM)

An apparatuses—cables, transformers, generators and others—can become overheated when
overloaded beyond design limits is placed into the system. The function of thermal overload
function (THM) determines temperature rising through monitoring a current; and the THM
detects the thermal overload of an apparatus.
THM has exponential characteristics according to IEC 60255-8 standard. THM

determines both the loss of I2R and a coolant cooling simultaneously; THM also determines
pre-load condition and signals a trip command when an overload condition arises.
THM issues a trip command in accordance with an alarm stage that reflects the
temperature of thermal overload condition. The alarm stage is configured using setting; hence,
user should set so that the trip command can be issued before the apparatuses are
overheated.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of THM features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have THM. To know whether THM and
Ordering No. at “G&T” 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C
THM ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
- 89 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.6.1 Thermal state determination

THM simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect an overload
condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined with the following equation:
𝐼𝐼 2 −𝑡�
θ= 2 �1 − 𝑠𝑠 τ� × 100 (%) (2.6-1)
𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴
where I is load current applied; IAOL is allowable overload current; τ is the constant of thermal
time. The τ is set using setting [TTHM].
Thermal state 0% is cold state, whereas 100% reflects thermal limit—which is the point
at which no further temperature rise and the system can be tolerated safely and be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is subject to setting [THM], which
determines the value of overload current. The THM signals a trip when the θ is on 100%.
THM gauges the largest current in three-phase; and it operates according to the
characteristics defined in IEC60255-8.
A period for trip depends not only on the degree of overload, but also on the degree of
load current as far as reaching the overload state. The period of the trip, that is, depends on
whether the overload is applied from ‘cold’ or ‘hot’. THM has a threshold for tripping and
alarming; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
2.6.2 Thermal characteristic

THM characteristics are determined with two equations. Equation (2.6-2) is used to define
cold state. Equation (2.6-3) is used to define hot state:
𝐼𝐼 2
t = τ ∙ Ln � 2 � (2.6-2)
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝑃𝑃2
t = τ ∙ Ln � 2 � (2.6-3)
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
where t is time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds), I is overload current (largest
phase current in amps), IAOL is allowable overload current (amps), Ip is previous load current
(amps), τ is thermal time constant (seconds), and Ln is natural logarithm.
In Equation (2.6-2), cold curves are special of the hot curves where Ip is zero, catering for
the situation where cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Figure 2.6-1 shows the cold state where an overload has been switched onto a previously
un-loaded system. Figure 2.6-2 shows the hot state where an overload is switched onto a
system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity. Both figures are in conformity
to IEC60255-8 curves, and these curves are drawn in a range of settings of the time constant
- 90 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(τ).
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no
prior load)
1000
100
Operate Time (minutes)

10
1 100
50
20
0.1 10
5
2
1
0.01
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.6-1 Thermal curves (cold curve –no prior load)

Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -
90% prior load)
1000
100
Operate Time (minutes)
10
τ
0.1 100
50
20
0.01 10
5
2
0.001 1
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of
IAOL)
Figure 2.6-2 Thermal curves (hot curve –90% prior load)
- 91 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.6.3 Scheme logic

Figure 2.6-3 shows the scheme logic of THM. THM has two thresholds; therefore, “A”
threshold is used for alarming, whereas another “T” threshold is for tripping. The output
signal of alarm is termed THM-OPT-ALARM and the output signal of tripping is termed
“THM-OPT-TRIP”.
The threshold is set using setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarm signal is removed when Off is set for scheme switch [THMA-EN]. The trip signal, on
the other side, stops when Off is set for scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to remove the operation of THM.
8000011C23 8000011B60 8300021B23

≥1 THM-OPA-ALARM
A 8100021C23 & & 8100021B60
THM 8400011B23
B
& THM-OPA-TRIP
& &
THMA-EN ON
&
THMT-EN ON
800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK 1
810002EBB0 THMT_BLOCK 1
Trip
THMA-UseFor
Alarm
Figure 2.6-3 THM Logic
- 92 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.6.4 Setting
Setting of THM(Function ID: 451001)

Default setting
Range
Un value
Setting item Contents Notes
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Thermal setting THMT-EN Off / On - Thermal protection enable Off
THMA-EN Off / On - Thermal alarm enable Off
THM 0.4 – 2.0 2.0 – 10.0 A Thermal overload current 1.0 5.0
TTHM 0.5 – 500.0 min Thermal time constant 10.0
Thermal alarm level multiplier
THM-Alarm 50 – 100 % 80
(Percentage of [THM] setting)
THM-q 0 – 10 - Thermal unbalance factor from I2 0
Thermal equivalent heating current
THM-Ieq Off / On - On
used
TFM-UseFor Trip / Alarm - THM used for trip or alarm Trip
To utilize the setting[THM-IP], and To
Test setting THM-Test Off / On - change the reset delay to instantaneous Off
reset
Previous load current for thermal
THM-IP 0.00 - 1.00 0.00 - 5.00 A 0.00/0.00
testing
- 93 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.6.5 Data ID

THM(Function ID: 451001)
8000011C23 THM-A THM relay element operated (Alarm)
8100021C23 THM-T THM relay element operated (Trip)
8000011B60 THM-ALARM THM protection Alarm signal
8100021B60 THM-TRIP THM protection Trip signal
8300021B23 THM-OPT-TRIP THM protection operated (Trip)
8400011B23 THM-OPT-ALARM THM protection operated (Alarm)

THM(Function ID: 451001)
800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM protection for Alarm block command
810002EBB0 THMT_BLOCK THM protection for Trip block command
- 94 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.7 Broken conductor protection (BCD)

A series fault or an open circuit fault—that accounts for neither a phase-fault nor an
earth-fault—is brought by breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, and false operation of
single-phase switchgear. IEC defines a series fault for which the impedances in each of
three-phase are not equal; hence, the series fault occurs by the interruption of one or two
phases results, as a rule. The function of broken conductor protection (BCD) is used to detects
the series fault and can signal a trip command for trip circuit.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of BCD features depends on the configuration of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have BCD. To know
whether BCD and its features are implemented or not in the IED, find the IED
ordering number; and check the order number at “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Section Ordering No. at “G&T” 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C
2.7.3 Blocking BCD by CTF NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA NA
- 95 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault

Figure 2.7-1 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when series fault occurs
in single-phase. We can account the series fault for the impedances of positive sequence,
negative sequence and zero sequence; the impedances are divided into left and right. The ratio
of the left to the right is determined by the fault location such as k1:1-k1, k2:1-k2, and
k0:1-k0.
E1A Series or open circuit fault E1B
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E
Positive sequence k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative sequence k0Z0 I0F I0F

(1-k0)Z0
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
Figure 2.7-1 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault
Series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F) and
zero phase sequence current (I0F) in single-phase. These are given by
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 + 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 + 𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = 0 (2.7-1)
𝑍𝑍2𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 ∙ 𝑍𝑍0𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = 0 (2.7-2)
𝐸𝐸1𝐴𝐴 ∙ 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 = 𝑍𝑍1𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 ∙ 𝑍𝑍2𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 (2.7-3)
where,
E1A ,E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
- 96 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
From Equation (2.7-1), (2.7-2), and (2.7-3), the following equations are derived:
𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍0
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (2.7-4)
𝑍𝑍1 𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍1 𝑍𝑍0 + 𝑍𝑍2 𝑍𝑍0 1𝐴𝐴
−𝑍𝑍0
𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (2.7-5)
−𝑍𝑍2
𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (2.7-6)
The magnitude of the fault current depends on impedance across the system, difference
in phase angle, and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
As noted earlier, BCD element detects the fault by measuring a ratio which is divided
negative sequence current by positive sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio can be given with
negative sequence impedance (Z2) and zero sequence impedance (Z0); hence, the equation of
the ratio is expressed as follows:
𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 |𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 | 𝑍𝑍0
= = (2.7-7)
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 |𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 | 𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍0
The ratio value is 0.5 or higher when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the negative
sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is high-impedance earthed or
a one-end earthed system.
2.7.2 Characteristic and setting

Figure 2.7-2 shows that BCD characteristic is hatched; BCD operates when positive sequence
current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In, and
value |I2/I1| is higher than setting [BCD].
I2
|𝐼𝐼2 |
�|𝐼𝐼 | ≥ 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
1
BCD
|𝐼𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 &
|𝐼𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼

0.01×In
o I1
0.04×In
Figure 2.7-2 Characteristic of BCD
- 97 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

(i) Harmonic detection function
The operation of BCD is removed when IED detects a harmonic, which is caused by a
magnetizing inrush current phenomenon as the transformer is energized. To block the
operation of BCD during the occurrence of the harmonic, set scheme switch [BCD-2fBlk]
Block.
(ii) Block operation of CTF for BCD

The operation of the BCD can be blocked by the function of a current transformer failure
(CTF) with scheme switches. Block is set for scheme switch [BCD-CTFBlk] if the operation of
BCD should be stopped when the current transformer failure occurs.
2.7.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.7-3 shows the scheme logic of BCD. BCD issues a trip command through a delayed
pick-up timer value of which is set for [TBCD]. The operation of BCD can be removed using
scheme switch [BCD-EN] Off.
TBCD
8000001C23
BCD t 0 8000001B60
& BCD-OPT
&
BCDEN 0.00 - 300.00s
+
On
CTF_DETECT
BCD-CTFBlk &
+ ≥1 1 8300001B23
Block & BCD-OPT-TRIP
800000EBB0 BCD_BLOCK Trip 8400001B62
BCD-UseFor & BCD-OPT-ALARM
Alarm
+
BCD-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.7-3 Broken conductor protection scheme logic
A current in negative phase sequence—that is seen in the system normally—restricts

the setting value of [BCD]. BCD determines the ratio (I2F/I1F) continuously. User can check the
present ratio along with the maximum value (I21 max) that has been examined for 15 minutes
ago. We recommend that user should distinguish the present ratio against the value on
commissioning stage; and user should set a value for [BCD] from 130% to 150% of the ratio
has been checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
- 98 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.7.5 Setting
Setting of BCD(Function ID: 452001)
Default setting
Range
Un value
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
BCD BCD-EN Off / On - BCD protection enable Off
BCD 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20
TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD operating delay time 1.00
BCD-2fBlk Non / Block - BCD operation block by 2f-detection Non
BCD-CTFBlk Non / Block - BCD operation block by CTF Non
BCD-UseFor Trip / Alarm - BCD used for trip or alarm Trip
- 99 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.7.6 Data ID

BCD(Function ID: 452001)
8000001C23 BCD BCD relay element operated
8000001B60 BCD-OPT BCD protection operated
8000001BB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD protection block command
8300001B23 BCD-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by BCD1 protection operation
8400001B62 BCD-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by BCD1 protection operation

BCD(Function ID: 452001)
800000EBB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD1 protection block command
- 100 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.8 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)

When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to remove a fault as a consequence of the CB failing to open,
the function of circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) is to remove the fault by the back-tripping
of other CBs. For example, if a fault current continues to flow following the issue of a trip
command, the CBF function determines that a CB failure has occurred and issues another
trip command to the adjacent CB(s) and/or the upstream CB.
Although a trip command will have been issued by other protection functions, CBF
protection has relay elements and timers that are used to detect the continuing presence of a
fault following the issuance of a trip command. The relay elements are termed OCCBF and
EFCBF, which run as protection functions within CBF.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of CBF features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have CBF. To know whether CBF and
CBF ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
- 101 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.8.1 CBF operation and its elements

The operation of CBF is initiated by the operation of OCCBF and EFCBF, which monitors
fault current after the issuance of a trip command by other protection functions. OCCBF or
EFCBF monitor the fault current so that the CBF feature can determine the failure of the CB
to operate. For CBF, the respective phase currents in three-phase system are monitored by
the OCCBF-A, OCCBF-B and OCCBF-C elements, while the zero-sequence current is
monitored by the EFCBF element.
The operation of these elements is reset if the threshold values of currents, which can be
applied by the setting of [OCCBF] and [EFCBF], are below the setting of 80%.
2.8.2 Re-trip feature

Once a CB failure occurs, the CBF protection would normally issue a back-trip command to
the adjacent CB(s) and/or the upstream CB. However, the CBF protection is able to issue a
further trip command to the faulted CB before issuing the back-trip command. The second
trip command is termed “re-trip”; “re-trip” confirms the occurrence of a CB failure. In the
event of an erroneous CBF operation, “re-trip” prevents the issue of the back-trip command to
the adjacent CB(s) or the upstream CB. The timing chart for “re-trip” and back-trip are
discussed later. (See Figure 2.8-1)
To enable the “re-trip” feature, set On-AftRe for scheme switch [CBF-Trip]. There are two
operation modes (internal and external mode) for “re-trip”; the user can select the desired
mode using scheme switch [CBF-Retrip]:
 Internal mode
If0 On is set for scheme switch [CBF-Retrip] the CBF function is armed for issuing a
“re-trip” command.
 External mode
When On-T is set for scheme switch [CBF-Retrip], the CBF function is armed for
issuing a “re-trip” after tripping.
For the re-trip operation, On should be set for both scheme switches [OCCBF] and
[EFCBF]. When a delay timer is needed for “re-trip”, a setting [TCBF-RE] is available. A
setting time can be chosen between 0 and 300.000sec, the time setting to be applied must be
determined in accordance with the response time of the CB. The setting time is addressed
later. (See Section 2.8.4)
One of the benefits of the “re-trip” function is that it can used to avoid accidental
- 102 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly requisite during

maintenance and testing of the system.
2.8.3 Backup feature

As cited above, “re-trip” issues a further trip command so that the CB receives an instruction
to trip again. If “re-trip” cannot remove the fault, CBF will issue a “back-trip” command.
Back-tripping is used as a last resort to remove the fault.
Fault occurence CBF Start Back-trip adjacent CB(s)
Adjacent CB(s) Closed

Open
On
Trip signal
Off Trip signal Trip signal Off
Normal trip Re-trip
Target CB Closed
Toc Tcb
Run
OCCBF element Stop Toc Toc Stop
Timer#1
Start TCBF-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF-RE) Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
Timer#2
Start TCBF-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF-TP) Off
On
CBF trip signal Off Off
Figure 2.8-1 Timing chart for re-trip and back trip during CBF operation
Figure 2.8-1 is a sequence diagram for the CBF function; the overall sequence illustrated
shows a target CB failing to remove a fault with the consequence that back tripping of the
adjacent CB(s) is required following operation of the CBF protection to finally clear the fault.
The CBF function is initiated via a signal from other protection function.
If the target CB is tripped normally on receipt of a trip signal so that the fault is
removed, both OCCBF and EFCBF will reset before the time settings of timer #1 and timer #2
have elapsed..
Following the issue of the first trip signal, if either OCCBF or EFCBF were to continue
to operate and if timer #1 were to time out according to the timer setting value [TCBF-RE], a
“re-trip” command would be issued to the target CB. If the target CB were to open to clear the
fault in response to the “re-trip” command, OCCBF and EFCBF would reset and the CBF
sequence is stopped.
- 103 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the “re-trip” command, and if
OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer #2 were to time out in accordance
with the setting time applied [TCBF-TP], CBF will issue a trip command to the adjacent CB(s)
to clear the fault, as a last resort.
2.8.4 Scheme logic

The CBF function can issue a trip command individually to each phase, as shown in Figure
2.8-2. In order to issue a trip signal, trip signals are required via the trip circuit (TRC).
CBF issues trip commands (CBF-RETRIP) when OCCBF and EFCBF run continuously
until expiration of timer settings [TCBF-RE] and [TCBF-TP]. Setting [TCBF-RE] is overridden
when On is set for scheme switch [CBF-TRIP].
As shown in Figure 2.8-2, CBF will operate for OCCBF, EFCBF, and PLC signal
“EXT.CBF-START” (internal mode).
It is possible to run with PLC signal EXT.CBF-START only. PLC signals

“EXT.CBF-START” are required. Signal “EXT.CBF-START” must be present continuously for
as long as the fault is present (external mode).
CBF_START-A
CBF_START-B
CBF_START-C
8000011C20 8000011B20
TCBF-RE
OCCBF A
t 0 CBF-RETRIP-A
8100011C21 & & &
≥1 ≥1 ≥1 8100011B21
B
t 0 CBF-RETRIP-B
8200011C22 & ≥1 & & 8200011B22
≥1 ≥1
C
t 0 CBF-RETRIP-C
& ≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1
OCCBF-EN ON 0.000-300.000s 8300011B23
8400011C27
& ≥1 CBF-RETRIP
EFCBF
&
OCCBF-EN &
ON
From &
TRC GEN.TRIP-A &
≥1
GEN.TRIP-B
≥1 &
GEN.TRIP-C
≥1 &
OFF
800001EBB0 EXT.CBF_START-A CBF-Retrip ON &
810001EBB1 EXT.CBF_START-B ON-T
&
820001EBB2 EXT.CBF_START-C
CBF-EN ON
CBF-EN-ON
830001EBB3 EXT.CBF_START
800001EBB4 CBF _BLOCK ≥1 CBF-NON_BLOCK
810001EBB5 CBF-RE_INST
Figure 2.8-2 Scheme logic in CBF
- 104 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8800011B24
TCBF-TP
t 0
CBF_START-A CBF-TRIP-A
& ≥1 ≥1 8900011B25
CBF_START-B t 0
CBF-TRIP-B
& ≥1 ≥1 8A00011B26
CBF_START-C t 0 CBF-TRIP-C
& ≥1 ≥1 8B00011B27
0.000-300.000s
CBF-TRIP
CBF-RETRIP-A ≥1
& &
CBF-RETRIP-B
& &
CBF-RETRIP-C
OFF & &
ON &
CBF-Trip ON-AftRe
&
CBF-EN-ON
CBF-NON_BLOCK
820001EBB6 CBF-TP_INST
Figure 2.8-3 Scheme logic in CBF (continued from Figure 2.8-2)
2.8.5 Operation timing

OCCBF and EFCBF check that the target CB has opened normally and that the fault current
has disappeared completely. Because load current is usually present, the setting of OCCBF
and EFCBF should be between 10% and 200% of the rated current.
The time settings [TCBF-RE] and [TCBF-TP] are determined in relation to the opening
time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements (see Toc and Tcb in
Figure 2.8-1). The following description illustrates a setting calculation example when “re-trip”
is used:
Setting of TCBF-RE =Breaker opening time + OCCBF/EFCBF reset time + Margin

=40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=70ms
Setting of TCBF-TP =TCBF-RE + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF/EFCBF reset time + Margin
=70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
=140ms
If “re-trip” were to be unused, the setting of [TCBF-TP] should be the same as the setting
for [TCBF-RE].
- 105 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.8.6 Setting
Setting of CBF(Function ID: 453001)
Default setting
Range
Un value
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
CBF Common CBF-EN Off / On - CBF protection enable Off
Current flow is monitored by OC relay

OCCBF-EN Off / On - On
operation
Current flow is monitored by EF relay
EFCBF-EN Off / On - Off
operation
OCCBF relay operating level (Current
CBF OCCBF 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
EFCBF relay operating level (Current
EFCBF 0.02 - 5.00/0.10 - 25.00 A 1.00/5.00
flow judgment)
CBF-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF retrip operation mode On
TCBF-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF retrip timer 0.150
CBF-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF trip operation mode On
TCBF-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF trip timer 0.200
- 106 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.8.7 Data ID
CBF(Function ID: 453001)
8000011C20 OCCBF-A OCCBF relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OCCBF-B OCCBF relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OCCBF-C OCCBF relay element operated (phase-C)
8400011C27 EFCBF EFCBF relay element operated
8000011B20 CBF_RETRIP-A OCCBF Retrip (phase-A)
8100011B21 CBF_RETRIP-B OCCBF Retrip (phase-B)
8200011B22 CBF_RETRIP-C OCCBF Retrip (phase-C)
8300011B23 CBF_RETRIP OCCBF Retrip
8800011B24 CBF_TRIP-A OCCBF trip (phase-A)
8900011B25 CBF_TRIP-B OCCBF trip (phase-B)
8A00011B26 CBF_TRIP-C OCCBF trip (phase-C)
8B00011B27 CBF_TRIP OCCBF trip
8000011BB0 EXT.CBF_START-A External CBF start(phase-A)
8100011BB1 EXT.CBF_START-B External CBF start(phase-B)
8200011BB2 EXT.CBF_START-C External CBF start(phase-C)
8300011BB3 EXT.CBF_START External CBF start

CBF(Function ID: 453001)
800001EBB0 EXT.CBF_START-A External CBF start(phase-A)
810001EBB1 EXT.CBF_START-B External CBF start(phase-B)
820001EBB2 EXT.CBF_START-C External CBF start(phase-C)
830001EBB3 EXT.CBF_START External CBF start
800001EBB4 CBF_BLOCK CBF protection block command
810001EBB5 CBF-RE_INST CBF instantaneous retrip
820001EBB6 CBF-TP_INST CBF instantaneous trip
- 107 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.9 Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC)

Switch-onto-fault function (SOTF) is used for detecting a fault promptly if circuit breakers
(CBs) close onto a pre-existing fault in the protection area. Suppose CBs try to close onto the
fault that is existing and cannot be removed, and if the memory circuit in IED fails to
memorize voltage data that retain pre-fault values; as a result, the fault cannot be detected by
conventional standard protection functions. Therefore, in order to avoid such failure, SOTF is
applied so that the fault should be detected for a certain period after CB is closed.
2.9.1 Scheme logic and setting

Figure 2.9-1 shows the scheme logic of SOTF.
8000001B60
OCSOTF-OR
≥1
8100001C20
8800001B62
A &
8100001C21 & SOTFOC-OPT-A
OCSOTF B 8900001B63
8100001C22 & SOTFOC-OPT-B
&
C
& 8A00001B64
From & SOTFOC-OPT-C
ICD-A
ICD
ICD-B
ICD-C
8300001B23
≥1 SOTFOC-TRIP
SOTFOC-EN ON
800000EBB0 SOTFOC_BLOCK 1 &
From
COMMON DEAD_LINE_DETECT
≥1 0 t
SOTF_EN_COND
SOTF-TEST 0.5s
ON
Figure 2.9-1 SOTF scheme logic
The SOTF signals four trip commands: SOTFOC-OPT-A, SOTFOC-OPT-B,

SOTFOC-OPT-C, and SOTFOC-OPT. These signals are sent to the trip circuit (TRC) function,
but a delay drop-off timer delays to send these signals for 0.5s. The TRIP is discussed
separately. (See chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.)
Setting [OCSOTF] is provided to determine the SOTF threshold. Setting

[OCSOTF-2fBlk] is used to override the SOTF function when the SOTF detects a second
harmonic. If Block-3P is set for the setting [OCSOTF-2fBlk], the SOTF overrides all OCSOTF
elements when the second harmonic comes up. On the other hand, if Block-PerP is set for the
- 108 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
setting [OCSOTF-2fBlk], the SOTF overrides the per-element of OCSOTF if the second
harmonic is appeared. The detection of the second harmonic is determined by the function of
inrush current detection (ICD). The ICD is discussed separately. (See chapter Relay
application: Inrush current detection function.)
The SOTF is applicable when On is set for the setting [SOTFOC-EN]. Setting
[SOTF-test] is used for the mandatory condition of cold load when testing.
- 109 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.9.2 Setting
Setting of SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
SOTF-OC SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable Off
OCSOTF 0.02 - 3.00 0.10 - 15.00 A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 6.00
OCSOTF operation block by
OCSOTF-2fBlk Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - Non
2f-detection
Forcibly establishing the cold load
SOTF-Test Off / On - Off
condition
- 110 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.9.3 Data ID
 Monitoring point for operation
SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
8000001C20 OCSOTF-A SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 OCSOTF-B SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 OCSOTF-C SOTFOC relay element operated (phase-C)
8000001B60 OCSOTF-OR SOTFOC relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8800001B62 SOTFOC-OPT-A SOTFOC protection operated (phase-A)
8900001B63 SOTFOC-OPT-B SOTFOC protection operated (phase-B)
8A00001B64 SOTFOC-OPT-C SOTFOC protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B23 SOTFOC-TRIP Trip signal by SOTFOC protection operation

SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
800000EBB0 SOTFOC_BLOCK SOTFOC protection block command
- 111 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.10 Inrush current detection function (ICD)

The Inrush Current Detection (ICD) function is provided for the purpose of detecting second
harmonic inrush current during transformer energizing, and is used to block other protection
functions1.
1Note: The individual protection functional elements are blocked independently when the
ICD signal is received by these protection functions. For ICD blocking, see the
respective protection functions.
2.10.1 Characteristic
The ICD function examines the ratio of second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental
current (I1f) for each phase. If the ratio|I2f |⁄|I1f | is larger than a setting value (ICD-2f), the
ICD function will identify the presence of inrush current. Figure 2.10-1 illustrates the
characteristic; the boundary of operation is designated by the hatched area. In this figure, the
threshold setting of the ICD function is represented by ICD-OC.
I2f
ICD-2f(%) = tanθ×100
|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%) & ICD
|I1f|≥ICD–OC
θ
I1f
0 ICD–OC
Figure 2.10-1 ICD element and characteristic
2.10.2 Setting
As shown in Figure 2.10-1, settings should be applied for both ICD-2f and ICD-OC when the
detection of second harmonic inrush current is required; setting [ICD-2F] and setting
[ICD-OC] are provided. The user should set On for scheme switch [ICD-EN] in order to enable
the ICD function.
2.10.3 Scheme logic

Figure 2.10-2 illustrates the ICD logic. When second harmonic inrush current is detected, the
ICD signal will be received by other protection functional elements.
8000001C20 To other Protection functions
A ICD-A
Protection function 1
B 8100001C21 Protection function 2
ICD-B
ICD 8200001C22 Protection function 3
C
ICD-C
3Phase
8300001C23
OR ICD-OR Protection function N
Figure 2.10-2 ICD logic
- 112 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.10.4 Setting
Setting of ICD(Function ID: 480001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
ICD-EN On /Off – ICD function enable
ICD-2f 10 – 50 % Second harmonic detection 15%
ICD-OC 0.10 – 5.00 0.5 – 25.0 0.01A / 0.1 A ICD threshold setting 0.10A 0.5A
2.10.5 Data ID
ICD(Function ID: 480001)
8000001C20 ICD-A ICD relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 ICD-B ICD relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 ICD-C ICD relay element operated (phase-C)
8300001C23 ICD-OR ICD relay element operated (3-phases OR)
- 113 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.11 Single-end fault locator (FL)

The function of the single-end fault locator (FL) is to determine the location of faults that
occur on a transmission line with high reliability. The determination of the fault location is
makes a useful contribution to the recovery of the circuit in the event of a power system
failure. The fault location provided by the FL function is computed using information at the
local end only; this computation is based on impedance-based algorithms.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of FL features depends on the selection of hardware and the
configuration of functions. Several IED models do not have FL. To know whether FL and its
features are implemented or not in the IED, find the IED ordering number; and check the
FL NA NA NA NA NA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ NA NA ✓ NA
- 114 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.11.1 Computation principle

The FL calculation requires more than three cycles of fault duration time. The FL calculation
uses a reference current (If") obtained by measuring the change in the current before and
after the occurrence of a fault. This is because the reference current (If") can remove the
influence of load current (IL) and arc voltage.
The accuracy† of the FL calculation is influenced by both a line impedance (Z) and a
fault current (If). Thus, the user should notice that the FL computation keeps on the accuracy
being less than ± 2.5 km (1.6 mile) for the distance GF up to 100km (62 mile)‡ regardless of
setting the length of the line GH ( 0 to 500 km (310 mile)). The accuracy of the FL calculation
is less than ± 2.5% when the fault is located 100 km to 500 km away far from the FL function,
provided the length of the line GH is 100 km to 500 km.
The FL calculation runs separately either for an earth fault or a phase-to-phase fault.
Hence, the selection of the algorithms are carried out depend on the fault occurrence.
†Note: Both line impedance and rated-current affect the accuracy of the FL computation.
For the VCT being set 1 ampere rated-current, the accuracy of the FL computation
can keep when the reactance of series-impedance per unit-length is greater than
0.05, provided the fault current flows greater than 2 ampere on the secondary side
of CT circuit. For the VCT being set 5 ampere rated-current, the same FL accuracy
can be kept when the reactance of series-impedance per-unit-length is greater than
0.01, provided the fault current flows greater than 10 ampere. For more
information of the rated-current in the VCT, see chapter Technical description:
Transformer module.
‡Note:In order to maintain the accuracy of the FL computation, the user can use
compensation factors when unbalanced impedances are appeared in the
transmission line.
(i) Equations for earth faults

Figure 2.11-1 shows an earth fault occurs in phase-a on the line GH. The fault distance
(GF = χ) can be determined using the following equations:
- 115 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Line GH
Distance GF
Bus G If Bus H
Local line
Fault F
FL IL
Source Load/Source
Adjacent line
G’ H’
Figure 2.11-1 Relation between fault location and local IED in paralleled line
2𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎 − 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏 – 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐

𝐼𝐼α = (2.11-1)
3
2𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎 − 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏 – 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 2𝐼𝐼𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝐼𝐼𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 – 𝐼𝐼𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿

𝐼𝐼α " = − (2.11-2)
3 3
Im�𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎 ・𝐼𝐼α "� × L

χ=
{Im(𝑅𝑅1 ∙ 𝐼𝐼α ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝛼𝛼 " + 𝑅𝑅0 ∙ 𝐼𝐼0s ∙ 𝐼𝐼α "+𝑅𝑅0𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝐼𝐼0m ∙ 𝐼𝐼α ") + Re(X1 ∙ 𝐼𝐼α ∙ 𝐼𝐼α " + X 0 ∙ 𝐼𝐼0s ∙ 𝐼𝐼α "+X 0𝑚𝑚 ∙ 𝐼𝐼0m ∙ 𝐼𝐼α ")} × 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎
(2.11-3)
where,
V α: Fault voltage (=Va0)
Iα: Fault current
Iα": Current change before and after fault occurrence
Ia, Ib, Ic: Fault currents in phase-a, phase-b, and phase-c
ILa, ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-a, phase-b, and phase-c
I0s: Zero-sequence current on the local line
I0m: Zero-sequence current on the adjacent line†
R 1: Resistance of positive-sequence self- impedance (Z1), [FL_R1]
X1: Reactance of positive-sequence self-impedance (Z1), [FL_X1]
R 0: Resistance of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_R0]
X0: Reactance of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_X0]
R0m: Resistance of zero-sequence mutual-impedance (Z0m)‡, [FL_R0m]
- 116 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
X0m: Reactance of zero-sequence mutual-impedance (Z0m)‡, [FL_X0m]

Ka: Compensation factor for phase-a in unbalance-3-phase line, [FL_Ka]
Im( ): Imaginary part when a value is placed in parentheses
Re( ): Real part when a value is placed in parentheses
L: Length of line GH in kilometers or miles, [FL_line_km] / [FL_line_mile]
Equation (2.11-3) is used generally when the transmission lines having lumped
constants are taken account. The user should consider the influence of distributed capacitance
of the transmission line. Therefore, when the fault distance (GF) is greater than 100km (62
mile), the FL computation introduces another fault distance (GF = χ") using Equation (2.11-4).
𝜒𝜒 3
χ" = 𝜒𝜒 − 𝑘𝑘 2 × (2.11-4)
3
where,
k: Propagation constant is pre-fixed by the manufacture for the transmission line.
(k=0.001𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘−1).
†Note: When the I0m current is accounted for the FL calculation, the user should notice
that the FL function requires the I0m current that another panel provides.
‡Note: When the FL computation is required on paralleled lines, the user should set
the zero-sequence mutual-impedance for both settings [FL_R0m] and [FL_X0m].
(ii) Equation for phase-to-phase faults

When the occurrence of a phase-b-to-phase-c fault is considered, the fault distance (GF = χ) is
computed using the following equations:
𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝐼𝐼b − 𝐼𝐼c (2.11-5)
𝑉𝑉𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝑉𝑉b − 𝑉𝑉c (2.11-6)
𝐼𝐼𝑓𝑓 " = 𝐼𝐼bc − (𝐼𝐼𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝐼𝐼𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ) (2.11-7)
𝐼𝐼𝑚𝑚 (𝑉𝑉𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ∙ 𝐼𝐼f ) × L

χ= (2.11-8)
{𝐼𝐼𝑚𝑚 (𝑅𝑅1 ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ∙ 𝐼𝐼f ) + 𝑅𝑅𝑒𝑒 (𝑋𝑋1 ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ∙ 𝐼𝐼f )} × 𝐾𝐾𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
where,
Ibc: Fault current in phase-b-to-phase-c
Vbc: Fault voltage in phase-b-to-phase-c
ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-b and phase-c before the fault occurrence
Kbc: Compensation factor for phase-bc in unbalanced-3-phase line, [FL_Kbc]
- 117 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Equation (2.11-8) is a general expression when the transmission lines are treated as having
lumped constants; Equation (2.11-8) is enough to compute the fault distance (GF = χ) within
100km (62 mile) when the transmission lines having the lumped constants. When the fault
distance is greater than 100km (62 mile), Equation (2.11-4) is used to obtain another fault
distance compensated (GF = χ").
2.11.2 Output of FL computation on screen

Although the screens and the operations in the standard IED are discussed separately in
Chapter User interface, the screens of the FL function is described here because the FL
output is unique compared to the standard screens. Figure 2.11-2 shows an example of the FL
screen.
a. Fault distance in kilometers
FL ****.*km
***% OB / NC
c. Fault information
b. Fault distance in percent
Figure 2.11-2 FL information in km and % on screen

Note: If there is an error in the setting information with regard to the length of the
transmission line, the FL computation does not start (a dash sign “—” is outputted
on the screen).
(i) Fault distance expressed in kilometers or miles

The fault distance can be displayed in user-preferred unit† (see Figure 2.11-2.a). Additionally,
the FL computation does not output the fault distance until a trigger signal‡ is not provided for
the FL function.
†Note:The user should note that the fault distance is based on the location of the local
IED (see Figure 2.11-1). Figure 2.11-2 is shown in kilometers, but the user can
change that the fault distance is expressed in miles. The setting is discussed later.
(See section 2.11.3(v))
‡Note:The trigger signal is discussed in section 2.11.4.
- 118 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Fault distance in percentage

The user can view the fault distance in a percentage (see Figure 2.11-2.b).
As shown in Figure 2.11-1, a single IED is located near Bus G. When a fault (F) occurs on
the line GH, the fault distance (GF) is calculated in percent using the following equation.
Distance to fault F
Fault distance (%) = × 100 (2.11-9)
lenght of Line GH
(iii) Fault information

Detailed information is displayed along with the fault distance (see Figure 2.11-2.c). The
output of the FL information is simplified by means of notations; these are summarized in
Table 2.11-2.
Table 2.11-2 Notation of fault information on screen

Fault info.
Meaning Comment
notation
The FL function determines a fault location being
OB Outside boundary outside of the boundary. The boundary is defined with
setting [FL_Line_km] or [FL_Line_mile].
Since a number of computation results are scattered, the
NC No convergence† FL function chooses one of the resulting values in order
that the scattering turns out to be small.
Note: The FL function can decide the convergence in the computation when the
difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is less than 0.2 km.
For the convergence decision, the values are taken at three times: a value at
present sampling, a value at pre-3-sampling, and a value at pre-6-sampling.
2.11.3 Setting and operation

To run FL function, the user should set several setting items: the direction for the fault
location, the mode selection for impedance settings, impedances† of local and adjacent lines,
imbalance-impedances and compensation factors, distance-unit for the FL function, and
others.
†Note:For impedance settings, the user should convert the primary values to the
secondary values with regard to the line VT and CT. Set impedances as the
total-impedances; do not set impedances as the impedance per distance-unit.
(i) Impedance setting using symmetrical components

Provided the self-impedances and the mutual-impedances are symmetrically balanced (that is,
- 119 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Zaa=Zbb=Zcc and Zab=Zbc=Zca), the symmetrical setting is applicable. If the symmetrical

setting is not applicable, the user shall set a compensation factor (section (i)-6) or use a matrix
setting (section (ii)).
If imbalanced impedances are considered, the following equations are used to acquire
zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedances. The calculations are internally carried out
in the FL function; thus, the user is not required to taken account:
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − (𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 +𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 )

Z1 = (2.11-10)
3
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 2(𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 )

Z0 = (2.11-11)
3
where,
Z 1: Positive-sequence series-impedance
Z 0: Zero-sequence series-impedance
Zaa, Zbb, Zcc: Self-impedances for each phase conductor
Zab, Zbc, and others: Mutual-impedances between each pair
With regard to the zero-sequence mutual-impedance in paralleled lines, the user should
set them for the settings [FL_R0m] and [FL_X0m] using Equation (2.11-12):
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Z0𝑚𝑚 = (2.11-12)
3
where,
Z0m: Zero-sequence mutual-impedance
Zam: Phase-a mutual-impedance between paralleled lines
Zbm: Phase-b mutual-impedance between paralleled lines
Zcm: Phase-c mutual-impedance between paralleled lines
(i)-1 Selection of symmetrical setting mode

Prior to setting, the user should set the scheme switch [FL_ImpSet] Symmetrical.
(i)-2 Setting zero-sequence impedance

With regard to the zero-sequence-impedance (Z0GH), the user should set the
resistance for setting [FL_R0] and the reactance for setting [FL_X0]. (See Figure
2.11-1)
- 120 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i)-3 Setting positive-sequence impedance

With regard to the positive-sequence-impedance (Z1GH), the user should set the
resistance of the resistance for setting [FL_R1] and the reactance for setting [FL_X1].
(See Figure 2.11-1)
(i)-4 Setting mutual-impedances and source-impedance in zero-sequence

 Setting mutual-impedance for paralleled lines (scheme switch [Z0B] = OFF)
When the FL function runs on paralleled lines, the user should set
zero-sequence mutual-impedance (Z0m) for resistance and reactance settings:
[FL_R0m] and [FL_X0m]. (See Figure 2.11-1)
 Setting source-impedance at both ends of the line (scheme switch [Z0B] = ON)
The user should set the information of the equivalent source-impedances at
local-end and remote-end of the line. The user should set a source-impedance before
Bus G in setting [FL_Z0B_L]. The user should set another source-impedance beyond
Bus H in setting [FL_Z0B_R]. (See Figure 2.11-1)
(i)-5 Calculation of zero- and positive-sequence impedances for imbalanced

impedances
With regard to the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedances, if the impedances
for each phase are not identical on the transmission lines (i.e., Zaa≠Zbb≠Zcc and
Zab≠Zbc≠Zca), the user should calculate symmetrical-impedances using Equations
(2.11-10) and (2.11-11); the user should set them for the settings [FL_R0], [FL_X0],
[FL_R1], and [FL_X1].
(i)-6 Setting compensation factors

Following section 2.11.3(i)-5, if the self- and mutual-impedances are unbalanced very
much, then the user should adjust the FL results using compensation factors
expressed using Equations (2.11-13) to (2.11-18). The user can set the values of
compensation factors for settings [FL_Kab] to [FL_Kc]†.
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
− 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
K 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 2 (2.11-13)
𝑍𝑍1
𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
− 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
K 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 2 (2.11-14)
𝑍𝑍1
- 121 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
− 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
K 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 2 (2.11-15)
𝑍𝑍1
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 −
K 𝑎𝑎 = 2 (2.11-16)
𝑍𝑍1
𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 −
K 𝑏𝑏 = 2 (2.11-17)
𝑍𝑍1
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −
K 𝑐𝑐 = 2 (2.11-18)
𝑍𝑍1
†Note:Set 100% for the settings when the impedance unbalances can be ignored in each of
phases.
(ii) Impedance setting using matrix components

As for Figure 2.11-1, when the voltage and current on transmission line can be expressed
using matrix components, the user can select the matrix setting:
𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑍𝑍𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎

�𝑉𝑉𝑏𝑏 � = �𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑍𝑍𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 � �𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏 � (2.11-19)
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐
where,
Zaa: Phase-a self-impedance on line GH (=Zbb=Zcc)
Zab: Mutual-impedances between phase-a and phase-b on line GH (=Zbc=Zca)
(ii)-1 Selection of matrix setting mode

Prior to setting, the user should set the scheme switch [FL_ImpSet] Matrix.
(ii)-2 Setting self-impedances

With regard to self-impedance, the user should set the resistance of the
self-impedances for settings [FL_Raa], [FL_Rbb], and [FL_Rcc]; the user should set
the self-impedances for settings [FL_Xaa], [FL_Xbb], and [FL_Xcc].
(ii)-3 Setting mutual-impedances
- 122 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
With regard to setting mutual-impedance, the user should apply the resistance of the
mutual-impedance for setting [FL_Rab], [FL_Rbc] and [FL_Rca]; the user should set
the reactance of the mutual-impedances for settings [FL_Xab], [FL_Xbc], and
[FL_Xca].
(ii)-4 Setting zero-sequence mutual-impedances in paralleled lines ([Z0B] = OFF )

(The user can apply the same setting ways discussed in section (i)-4.)
(ii)-5 Settin zero-sequence source-impedance at both ends of line ([Z0B] = ON)

(The user can apply the same setting ways discussed in section (i)-4.)
(iii) Assumption of fault direction

The user can choose the direction for FL computation, in either forward or reverse direction.
When the forward direction is selected, other protection elements relating to the FL
computation should have the same direction (that is, the user should align the directions in
the computation). If the user selects the reverse direction, the other corresponding functions
should have the reverse direction. Otherwise, the FL computation will fail to start.
Figure 2.11-3 shows the relationship between the occurrence of faults and the direction
of FL computations. The user should set the scheme switch [FL_Dir] Forward provided the
fault is assumed to occur in the forward direction. Conversely, set [FL_Dir] Reverse provided
the fault is assumed to occur in the reverse direction.
Bus G Bus G
Fault Fault If
If
IED IED
IEF
IEF
a. Fault in Forward direction b. Fault in Reverse direction
Figure 2.11-3 Forward fault and reverse fault
Table 2.11-3 Setting [FL_DIR] corresponding to the settinga of OC and other relay elements
Direction of the relay (OC elemen etc) Scheme switch [FL_DIR]
Forward Forward
Reverse Reverse
Non-dir Forward / Reverse
- 123 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv) Compensation for earth fault in paralleled lines

The FL computation is to response an earth fault when the residual current (3I0) on adjacent
line is introduced. This is because that the residual current can compensate the input current
when the earth fault occurs. It is also possible to compensate the input current using the
source-impedance if the residual current on the adjacent line is not available. Note that this
compensation is only used when the I0m cannot be introduced in the paralleled lines.
We recommend that the input current should be compensated by the residual current on
the adjacent line; the compensation using the residual current can improves the accuracy of
FL computation. (Set scheme switch [FL-Z0B] to Off)
If the residual current on the adjacent line is not available, the user should set the
scheme switch [FL-Z0B] On so that the FL result is compensated using the zero-sequence
source-impedances for an earth fault. Table 2.11-4 summarizes compensation means and
settings for an earth fault.
Table 2.11-4 Method and setting of earth fault compensation

Required setting objects Required power
Compensation Switch Impedance quantities for
Compensation meaning
method [FL-Z0B] setting respective
operations
When the residual current is available

[FL_R0m]
in the adjacent line, the compensation I0m, Ia, Ib, Ic,
Residual-current Off and
method “Residual-current” is Va, Vb, Vc
[FL_X0m]
applicable.
[FL_Z0B_L],
If the residual current is not
[FL_Z0B_R],
available, the compensation method Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb,
Source-impedance On [FL_R0m],
“Source-impedance” should be Vc
and
selected.
[FL_X0m]
†Note: For a single line circuit, the local IED can compute the residual current (3I0)
using AC analog input currents by itself; the FL compensation is carried out
automatically at a local IED. Therefore, the user is not required to set the scheme
switch [FL-Z0B] Off.
(v) Setting of the unit of length/distance

As shown in Figure 2.11-2, the fault location is displayed in kilometers when km is set for
scheme switch [FL_Unit]. On the other hand, if the preference is to display the fault location
in miles, the user should set mile for the scheme switch [FL_Unit]. In the case that km is set
for scheme switch [FL_Unit], the user can set value of setting [FL_Line_km] is used as the line
length value. In the case that mile is selected in setting [FL_Unit], the value of setting
- 124 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
[FL_Line_mile] is used as the line length value.
(vi) Setting of FL execution

The FL computation is ready out when On is set for setting [FL_EN].
2.11.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.11-4 shows a trigger signal for FL data recording and computation. The elements of
the overcurrent protection function (OC) output signals when respective elements operate. As
the direction of both the FL calculation and the elements of protection functions should be
matched, the user should set each direction being equal with the direction of FL computation.
The signals are provided by the following functions: (a) Over current protection function
and (b) External protection function. With regard to the signals of the external protection
function, the user is allowed to program triggers for data-saving and calculation using Data
IDs. The following Data IDs (i.e., PLC connection points) are provided in order that the
trigger makes to start the FL calculation.
Data ID “FL_RecF” and “FL_RecR”: Trigger for data save
Data ID “FL_LocF” and “FL_LocR”: Trigger for of calculation
Forward
310022EC60 FLZ_RecF Trigger signal for data
& recording in the forward
Reverse
310022EC61 FLZ_RecR
Trigger signal for data
& recording in the reverse
Forward
Trigger signal for
310022EC62 FLZ_LocF & computation in the
forward
Reverse
310022EC63 FLZ_LocR Trigger signal for
& computation in the
reverse
Forward
FL-DIR Reverse
Figure 2.11-4 Trigger signals from OC function and PLC
- 125 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.11.5 Setting
Setting of FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
Switch FL_EN Off / On — Fault locator enable On
Selection of the direction for fault
FL_Dir Forward / Reverse — Forward
location
Selection in the setting mode for
FL_ImpSet Symmetrical / Matrix — Symmetrical
impedance
Zero sequence compensation of
FL_Z0B Off/ On — —
the parallel line
FL_Unit km / mile — Selection of line length unit km
Line1_Element FL_Line_km 0.0 – 500.0 km Line length (km) 50.0
FL_line_mile 0.0 – 310.0 mi Line length (mile) 0
Reactance component of line
FL_Xaa 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10.5 2.1
(Xaa)
FL_Xbb 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10.5 2.1
(Xbb)
FL_Xcc 0–1000 0–200 Ω Reactance component of line (Xcc) 10.5 2.1
FL_Xab 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xab)
FL_Xbc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xbc)
FL_Xca 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.5 0.1
(Xac)
Resistance component of line
FL_Raa 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Raa)
FL_Rbb 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Rbb)
FL_Rcc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1.1 0.21
(Rcc)
FL_Rab 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rab)
FL_Rbc 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rbc)
FL_Rca 0–1000 0–200 Ω 0.1 0.01
(Rac)
FL_X1 0–1000 0–200 Ω 10 2
positive sequence impedance
FL_R1 0–1000 0–200 Ω 1 0.2
positive sequence impedance
Reactance component of line zero
FL_X0 0–1000 0–200 Ω 34 6.8
sequence impedance
Resistance component of line zero
FL_R0 0–1000 0–200 Ω 3.5 0.7
sequence impedance
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kab 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kbc 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kca 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Ka 50–150 % 100
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kb 50–150 % 100
- 126 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Setting of FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kc 50–150 % 100
0.00 – 0.00 – Reactance component of line
FL_X0m Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 mutual zero sequence impedance
0.00 – 0.00 – Resistance component of line
FL_R0m Ω 1.00 0.02
1000.00 200.00 mutual zero sequence impedance
0.00 – 0.00 – Zero-sequence source-impedance
FL_Z0B_L Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 at local terminal
0.00 – 0.00 – Zero sequence source/Load
FL_Z0B_R Ω 10.00 2.00
1000.00 200.00 impedance at remote terminal
- 127 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.11.6 Data ID
FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
4200001340 FltDiskm Fault distance
4200101347 FltZ Fault impedance
3100101348 FltLoop Fault loop
3100101005 FltQuality Quality of fault locator

FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
310002EC60 FL_RecF Record start signal (forward)
310002EC61 FL_RecR Record start signal (reverse)
310002EC62 FL_LocF Fault locate start signal (forward)
310002EC63 FL_LocR Fault locate start signal (Reverse)
- 128 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.12 Trip circuit (TRC)

The trip circuit (TRC) scheme logic will issue a trip signal to a circuit breaker (CB) when it
receives trip commands from the IED protection functions (OC, EF, and others). The user can
configure the issue of trip commands for the CB; configuration is performed using the PLC
connection points provided in the TRC logic.
IED
Protection TRC function Binary IO

functions module #1
OC TRIP COMMAND
BO1
CB#1
EF
OPT-TRIP-A BO2 Feeder1
OCN
Trip OPT-TRIP-B Trip signal GEN.TRIP
UC command generation
OPT-TRIP-C
TMH grouping
OPT-TRIP BO n Feeder #n
BCD
Distributed lines
SOTF
Protection
functions
Sub-signal GEN-OPERATION
ARC
CBF generation
CBF
Alarm GEN.ALARM ≥ GEN.TRIP_ALARM

signal
grouping
Trigger signal ‘phase-a’
Recording
Trigger signal ‘phase-b’
function
Trigger signal ‘phase-c’
PLC signals
Trigger signal ‘General alarm’
Figure 2.12-1 TRC block diagram
As shown in Figure 2.12-1, the TRC logic consists of four parts: (1) Trip commands
grouping, (2) Trip command production for Binary IO modules, (3) Sub-signal production for
ARC and CBF§, and (4) Alarm signals grouping. With regard to the actual trip signal, the
binary output (BO) circuit will issue a trip signal command for the CB via a binary IO module;
hence, the user should connect the TRIP COMMAND to the BO circuit prior to operation†.
Additionally, the TRC logic provides trigger signals for fault and event recording‡ using the
Alarm signals grouping scheme; the trigger signals initiate the operation of recording
function.
§Note: ARC and CBF functions are discussed separately in Chapter Relay application.
†Note:The connection between the trip command and the BO is pre-configured when the
IED is shipped from the factory. The user can see the default connections (settings)
in Appendix: Manufacturer settings.
‡Note: For information on the recording function, see Chapter Recording function.
- 129 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.12.1 Operation for three-pole breaker

The TRC logic is designed to trip all poles of the CB. Table 2.12-1 shows the output signals for
the CB when a fault occurs. The user should check and ensure that the TRC issues a
three-phase trip signal to the CB.
Table 2.12-1 Issuing signals to CB on the occurrence of fault

Fault phase Reception of commands at TRC Output signals for CB circuit
A OPT_TRIP-A
B OPT_TRIP-B
C OPT_TRIP-C
A&B OPT_TRIP-A & -B TRIP-COMMAND

B&C OPT_TRIP-B & -C
C&A OPT_TRIP-C & -A
All OPT_TRIP (=OPT_TRIP-A&B&C)
2.12.2 Scheme logic

(i) Trip command grouping
Trip command grouping groups the trip commands provided by each protection and
distributes them to the trip operation commands “OPT-TRIP”, “OPT-TRIP-A”,
“OPT-TRIP-B”, and “OPT-TRIP-C”†, as shown in Figure 2.12-2.
The TRC logic has PLC connection points that the user can program for issuing the trip
command. For example, if the user wishes to use apparatus signals in order to trip the CB, the
user can connect the signals to the TRC logic using PLC connection points: TRIP-A_ADD,
TRIP-B_ADD, and TRIP-C_ADD.
†Note: For the GRD200 series, none of the IED protection function trip command signals
are directly connected to the trip operation commands “OPT-TRIP”, “OPT-TRIP-A”,
“OPT-TRIP-B”, and “OPT-TRIP-C”†.
- 130 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8000001B60
(No signal is connected) ≥1 OPT-TRIP-A
800000EBB3 TRIP-B_ADD
8100001B61
(No signal is connected) ≥1 OPT-TRIP-B
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD
8200001B62
(No signal is connected) ≥1 OPT-TRIP-C
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD
From Relay applications 8300001B63
OC OC_OPT-TRIP ≥1 OPT-TRIP
EF EF_OPT-TRIP
OCN OCN_OPT-TRIP
UC UC_OPT-TRIP
THM THM_OPT-TRIP
SOTF SOTF_OPT-TRIP
830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD
Figure 2.12-2 Conversion of received signals to three phase trip signals
(ii) Trip signal production

Figure 2.12-3 illustrates the trip signal generation function within the TRC logic. As shown in
Table 2.12-1, the TRC signal “TRIP-COMMMAND” will be issued for the CB when signals
OPT-TRIP-A, -B, and -C appear.
8000001B60
OPT-TRIP-A ≥1
8100001B61
OPT-TRIP-B
8200001B62
OPT-TRIP-C
& ≥1 8300001B6F
8300001B63
OPT-TRIP GEN.TRIP
810000EBB1 ADD-FS ≥1
≥1 8300001B78
820000EBB0 USE-FS 1 TRIP_COMMAND
830000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM
From
CBF1-RETRIP
CBF
Figure 2.12-3 Scheme logic of Trip signal generation
- 131 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The signal “TRIP_COMMAND” is designated using Data ID. Therefore, the user can
connect the signal “TRIP_COMMAND” to a BO circuit; the IED provides settings [Input
signal1] to [Input signal8] in each BO in each binary IO module. The Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module describes how to connect Data ID with the connection point.
(iii) Sub-signal generation

Figure 2.12-4 shows the sub-signal generation function within the TRC logic; it produces
signals for protection functions outside the TRC logic.
To
ARC-D, CBF
From GEN.TRIP
Relay applications
OC OC-ARC-BLOCK
EF EF-ARC-BLOCK ≥1
≥1
OCN OCN-ARC-BLOCK
UC UC-ARC-BLOCK 8500001B79
THM THM-ARC-BLOCK GEN.ARC-BLOCK
BCD BCD-ARC-BLOCK
SOTF SOTF-ARC-BLOCK
CBF CBF-ARC-BLOCK
Figure 2.12-4 Scheme logic for Sub-signal generation
- 132 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv) Alarm signal grouping

From Relay applications To Recording function
OC 8000001B66
OC_OPT-ALARM
OC_OPT-AR ≥1 OPT-AR
OC_OPT-BR
OC_OPT-CR
880000EBB8 OPT-P-A_ADD
UC UC_OPT-ALARM
UC_OPT-AR 8100001B67
UC_OPT-BR
≥1 OPT-BR
UC_OPT-CR
890000EBB9 OPT-P-B_ADD
EF OC_OPT-ALARM 8200001B68
OCN OCN_OPT-ALARM ≥1 OPT-CR

THM THM_OPT-ALARM
8A0000EBBA OPT-P-C_ADD
8400001B64
≥1 GEN-ALARM
840000EBB7 OPT-ALALM_ADD
Figure 2.12-5 Scheme logic for Alarm signal grouping
Figure 2.12-5 shows the alarm signal grouping function within the TRC logic; it produces
signals for the recording functions outside the TRC logic.
- 133 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.12.3 Data ID
TRC(Function ID: 4A1001)
8000001B60 OPT-TRIP-A Operation (phase-A)
8100001B61 OPT-TRIP-B Operation (phase-B)
8200001B62 OPT-TRIP-C Operation (phase-C)
8300001B63 OPT-TRIP Operation (trip)
8400001B64 GEN.ALARM Operation (GEN.ALARM)
8500001B65 OPT-ARC-BLOCK Operation (ARC-BLOCK)
8000001B66 OPT-AR Operation (AR)
8100001B67 OPT-BR Operation (BR)
8200001B68 OPT-CR Operation (CR)
8400001B69 OPT-ABR Operation (ABR)
8500001B6A OPT-BCR Operation (BCR)
8600001B6B OPT-CAR Operation (CAR)
8300001B6F GEN.TRIP General trip
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A Operating phase-A
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B Operating phase-B
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C Operating phase-C
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N Operating phase-N
8000001B77 GEN.TRIP_ALARM General trip or General alarm
8300001B78 TRIP COMMAND TRIP COMMAND
8500001B79 GEN.ARC-BLOCK Auto-reclose Block Command
 Connection points in PLC logic

TRC(Function ID: 4A1001)
820000EBB0 USE_FS Introduction of user external Fail Safe function
810000EBB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command
830000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD Additional trip command
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Additional alarm output command
880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command
890000EBB9 OPT.P-B_ADD Additional operated phase-B command
8A0000EBBA OPT.P-C_ADD Additional operated phase-C command
8C0000EBBB OPT.P-AB_ADD Additional operated phase-AB command
8D0000EBBC OPT.P-BC_ADD Additional operated phase-BC command
8E0000EBBD OPT.P-CA_ADD Additional operated phase-CA command
800000EBBE OPT.P-N_ADD Additional operated phase-N command
- 134 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.13 Autoreclose function (ARC)

2.13.1 Overview
Autoreclose function (ARC) restores service more expeditiously after tripping CB if a fault
occurs transiently. ARC can provide both single-shot scheme and multi-shot scheme.
2.13.2 Three-phase auto-reclose

User can operate ARC when On is set for scheme switch [ARC_EN]; and ARC operates in
three-phase auto-reclose mode. If CB is tripped, reclosing of the tripped-pole(s) are performed.
(i) ARC start logic

Figure 2.13-1 shows that start logic in ARC. If CB is tripped, signal “GEN.TRIP” is provided
from trip circuit (TRC); and ARC starts to operate. Logics SHOT1 to SHOT5 are used to
generate up to five shots (ARC-SHOT1 to ARC-SHOT5) to reclose CB. The numbers of these
shots can be set with settings. (See section 2.13.3) Signals “ARC-S1 TRR” to “ARC-S5 TRR”
are provided for final trip.
8100001B60
EXT_START_SIGNAL
From 8000001B60
TRC GEN.TRIP & 8000001B65
≥1
S ARC-SHOT1
R SHOT1 logic
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_STAR
0.01sec
ARC-S1 TRR
8100001B66
ARC-SHOT2
SHOT2 logic
ARC-S2 TRR
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT 1
&
8200001B67
ARC-EN
ARC-SHOT3
SHOT3 logic
ARC-S3 TRR
8300001B68
ARC-SHOT4
SHOT4 logic
ARC-S4 TRR
8400001B69
ARC-SHOT5
SHOT5 logic
ARC-S5 TRR
SPAR logic
Figure 2.13-1 Start logic
(ii) SHOT1 logic

Figure 2.13-2 shows the logic of the first shot; and this logic provides a first shot
(ARC-SHOT1). Two delay timers [TSHOT] and [TSHOT_SUB] are provided, and user can
adjust the output time of the first shot. User can also configure to output the first shot using
four PLC signals, but “ARC_MAIN_START” and “ARC_MAIN_COND” are set “1” using PLC
signal “Constant_1 (1)”, as default. Hence, the first shot will be outputted unconditionally
- 135 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
unless user configures these PLC signals.
TSHOT
t 0
& & & ≥1
0.01 – 310.00 sec

CB poles are 800000EBB5 ARC_MAIN_START
tripped
Default = Constant_1
800000EBB6 ARC_MAIN_COND
Default = Constant_1
TSHOT_SUB
t 0
& &
0.01 – 310.00 sec

8100001BB7 ARC_SUB_START
8100001BB8 ARC_SUB_COND
TRR
t 0
SHOT1 logic
0.01 – 310.00 sec
Figure 2.13-2 SHOT1 logic
(iii) Start condition and operation with VCHK

When the signals of line voltages are provide, ARC can issue ARC shots when the satisfied
signal are provided from VCHK. In order to operate ARC together with VCHK, a PLC signal
from VCHK should be connected to PLC connection point “ARC_MAIN_COND”, which is
shown in Figure 2.13-2. In this case, ARC starts depending on voltage condition, which is
discussed in Chapter Relay application: Voltage check for autoreclose.
2.13.3 Number of shots

(i) Setting of number of shots
To reclose a CB, user can select the number of shots using scheme switch [ARC-NUM].
When single-shot (S1) is set for scheme switch [ARC-NUM], a single shot is generated
only once to reclose a CB. When multi shots (S2–S5) are set for scheme switch [ARC-NUM],
several shots for re-closing are generated for CB. For example, when S2 is set for the scheme
switch [ARC-NUM], re-closing CB is performed up to two times. That is, if the first shot fails to
close CB, and another shot will be generated after the first shot. If a permanent fault occurs
after the completion of the second re-closing operation, all three-poles of CB are re-tripped,
and re-closing of three-poles is not performed (That is, final trip). This above example is
carried out.
(ii) Dead time

Several shots are generated for ARC operation; hence, respective dead timers are provided for
respective shots. To set a dead timer for first shot, user should set a time for setting [TSHOT].
- 136 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
To set dead timers for second shot to fifth shot, user should set a time for settings [TD_MS2] to
[TD_MD5].
(iii) Final trip by rejection

If the criterion on CB reclose is not satisfied, the output signals of ARC were rejected; that is,
ARC fails to output the shots. As a result, final trip is initiated so that the all poles of CB are
opened.
To decide the operation of final trip, reset timers are provided for respective shots. For
the timer for first shot, setting [TRR] is provided. Likewise, settings [TRR_MS2], [TRR_MS3],
[TRR_MS4], and [TRR_MS5] are provided for second to fifth shot.
2.13.4 Issuing ARC command

Figure 2.13-3 shows that ARC issues a reclose signal “ARC CLOSE COMMAND” generated
by SHOT1 to SHOT5 logics. Setting [TCCW] is provided to decide the pulse width for “ARC
CLOSE COMMAND”.
ARC SHOT1 ≥1
TCCW
8000001B6A
ARC SHOT2
ARC CLOSE COMMAND
ARC SHOT3
ARC SHOT4 0.01 – 10.00 sec
ARC SHOT5
Figure 2.13-3 Auto reclose command of ARC SHOT
2.13.5 Success decision of reclose operation

This feature determines whether the CB has been closed or not after the reclose operation by
ARC. When this decision is required, On is set for scheme switch [ARC-SusCHK].
(i) ARC success check time (TARCSUS)

ARC checks whether its operation is successful or not. If all the poles of CB are closed within a
time after a shot has been generated, it is determined that the CB has been closed
successfully (which is termed as “AS”). If not, it is determined that the CB has not been closed
(which is termed as “AF”), then the final trip is generated to open all the poles of CB.
(ii) Successful operation

Successful operation could be decided if auto-reclosing shots (ARC-SHOT) were generated for
the CBs, and if all poles of the CBs were in close condition within a time, which is configured
by the setting [TARSCUS]. The valid time range is 0.10 to 100.00sec.
(iii) Unsuccessful operation

Unsuccessful operation should be decided if the tripped poles of the CB were not in closed
- 137 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
condition within the time set by setting [TARCSUS].
2.13.6 Reclaim time (TREADY)

The power transmission can recover by ARC operation. The reclaim time (the time necessary
to clear the fault and to re-close the CB) should be as short as possible to keep the power
system stable. From the point of de-ionization of the fault arc, the reclaim time should last
completely. The de-ionization starts when the CBs at all terminals are tripped. Therefore, it is
important to use the reclaim time being used with other protection functions, and should be
set at its minimum level as if all terminals of the line trip at the same time. The period of the
reclaim time is set by the setting [TREADY].
2.13.7 Test shot function

Scheme switch [SHOTNUM-TEST] is provided for the ARC test. For example, if test operation
is required for the second shot, S2 is set for the scheme switch [SHOTNUM-TSET]. Off is set
for this scheme switch when the test operation is finished.
2.13.8 Number of ARC shot coordinated

When a feeder is protected by two or more relays, the number of ARC shots in these relays
should be coordinated.
Bus A Bus B Fault F
Relay A Relay B
Figure 2.13-4 Occurrence of Fault F and locations of relays
For example, as shown in Figure 2.13-4, both relay A and relay B protect the same
feeder; both are programmed to operate in two instantaneous trips and two IDMT trips. If
Fault F occurs permanently, both relays will detect this fault. Both relays issue trip
commands for the CBs instantly; then reclose shots (ARC SHOT1) of both relays are issued.
After that, second reclose shots (ARC SHOT2) are issued from respective relays after the
operation of second trip.
Let us postulate that different IDMTs are set in the both relays. When we consider third
reclose shots (ARC SHOT3), it is considered that issuing a trip is carried out only in relay B.
In this case relay A issues neither a trip command nor an ARC shot; consequently, relay A
decides so that the operation of ARC has been succeeded; relay A will be reclaimed and relay A
can returns to the beginning of ARC cycle (that is, ARC in relay A starts with ARC SHOT1).
On the other hand, relay B yet tries to issue forth reclose shot (ARC SHOT4) after forth
- 138 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
trip command delayed are issued. Conversely, a mal-instantaneous trip can be introduced by
relay A.
In order to avoid the above case, co-ordination function is required to unify the number
of ARC shots. Figure 2.13-5 shows that the coordination is made by this function. This
coordination is carried out by the operation of an over current element (OC) and an earth fault
element (EF) in ARC.
Co-ordination disabled:
1st trip 2nd trip No trip & judged ARC succeed
(Inst) (Inst)
1st trip (Inst): mal-operate
Relay A
1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip No trip

(Inst) (Inst) (IDMT)
Relay B
Co-ordination enabled:
1st trip 2nd trip No trip No trip
(Inst) (Inst)
Relay A
1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip 4th trip

(Inst) (Inst) (IDMT) (IDMT)
Relay B
Figure 2.13-5 Coordination of shot number
User can set the thresholds of OC and EF using settings [CO-OC] and [CO-EF],
respectively. To operate this function, set [ARCCO-OCEN] and [ARCCO-EFEN] On.
- 139 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.13.9 Setting
Setting of ARC(Function ID: 4A7001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
ARC-EN Off/On – Auto reclose mode in 1CB-system Off
ARC-NUM S1/S2/S3/S4/S5 – Auto reclose maximum shot number S1
ARC-SucChk Off/On – Autoreclose success checking enable On
TARCDSUC 0.10-100.00 s Autoreclose success checking time 0.30
TRESET Autoreclose reset time under CB
0.01-300.00 s 0.30
closed
SHOTNUM-Test Off/S1/S2/S3/S4/S5/S6 – Auto reclose test shot number Off
TREADY 0.0 – 600.00 s Autoreclose ready check time 60.0
TSHOT 0.01 – 300.00 s Autoreclose SHOT dead time 0.60
TSHOT_SUB 0.01 – 300.00 s Autoreclose sub-SHOT dead time 300.00
TRR 0.01 - 310.00 s Autoreclose reset time 2.00
TCCW Autoreclose ARC command pulse
0.01-10.00 s 0.20
width
TD_MS2 0.01 – 300.00 s 2nd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS2 0.01 - 310.00 s 2nd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS3 0.01 – 300.00 s 3rd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS3 0.01 - 310.00 s 3rd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS4 0.01 – 300.00 s 4th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS4 0.01 - 310.00 s 4th shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS5 0.01 – 300.00 s 5th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS5 0.01 - 310.00 s 5th shot ARC reset time 30.00
ARCCO-OCEN Off/On – Autoreclose OC enable Off
ARCCO-EFEN Off/On – Autoreclose EF enable Off
CO-OC 0.02-50.00 0.10-250.00 A Autoreclose OC threshold 1.00 5.00
CO-EF 0.02-50.00 0.10-250.00 A Autoreclose EF threshold 0.30 1.50
- 140 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.13.10 Data ID
ARC(Function ID: 4A7001)
8100001B60 EXT_START_SIGNAL External ARC operation
8000001B61 ARC_START ARC start by general trip
8000001B63 ARC READY ARC ready
8200001B64 ARC IN-PROG ARC in progress
8000001B65 ARC SHOT1 ARC shot1
8000001B6A ARC CLOSE COMMAND CB close command for ARC
8000001B6B FT ARC UNREADY Final trip under ARC unready condition
8400001B6C ARC FT Final trip for ARC
8700001B6D ARC RESET ARC reset when ARC no action or success
8400001B6E SHOT NUMBER OVER Shot number over
8C00001B6F ARC CLOSE FAIL ARC fail
8000001B70 ARC CLOSE SUCCESS ARC success
8000001B71 SHOT_1ST 1st shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8100001B72 SHOT_2 2ND shot from Multi shot ARC counter

ND
8200001B73 SHOT_3RD 3RD shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8300001B74 SHOT_4TH 4TH shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8000001B77 SHOT_MULTI shot from Multi shot ARC counter
8000001B78 CO-OC A Phase OC relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001B79 CO-OC B Phase OC relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001B7A CO-OC C Phase OC relay element operated (phase-C)
8300001B7B CO-EF EF relay element operated
8100001B7C ARC COORD ARC Coordination
8000001BB0 ARC-OFF Off mode for autoreclose
8100001BB1 ARC-ON On mode for autoreclose
8000001BB2 EXT.ARC_START External ARC start signal
8000001BB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC
8000001BB4 CB-ARC READY CB ready signal for ARC
8000001BB5 ARC_MAIN_START For three-phase ARC start
8000001BB6 ARC_MAIN_COND For three-phase ARC condition
8100001BB7 ARC_SUB_START For three-phase ARC start (sub)
8100001BB8 ARC_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC condition (sub)
8100001BB9 ARC-S2 COND ARC shot2 condition
8200001BBA ARC-S3 COND ARC shot3 condition
8300001BBB ARC-S4 COND ARC shot4 condition
8400001BBC ARC-S5 COND ARC shot5 condition
8000001BBD CB_MANUAL_CLOSE CB1 manual close signal
8000001BBE ARC_BLOCK ARC block signal
- 141 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

ARC(Function ID: 4A70001)
800000EBB0 ARC-OFF Off mode for autoreclose
810000EBB1 ARC-ON On mode for autoreclose
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START External ARC start signal
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC
800000EBB4 CB-ARC READY CB ready signal for ARC
800000EBB5 ARC_MAIN_START For three-phase ARC start
800000EBB6 ARC_MAIN_COND For three-phase ARC condition
810000EBB7 ARC_SUB_START For three-phase ARC start (sub)
810000EBB8 ARC_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC condition (sub)
810000EBB9 ARC-S2 COND ARC shot2 condition
820000EBBA ARC-S3 COND ARC shot3 condition
830000EBBB ARC-S4 COND ARC shot4 condition
840000EBBC ARC-S5 COND ARC shot5 condition
800000EBBD CB_MANUAL_CLOSE CB1 manual close signal
800000EBBE ARC_BLOCK ARC block signal
800000EBB0 ARC-OFF Off mode for autoreclose
810000EBB1 ARC-ON On mode for autoreclose
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START External ARC start signal
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC
800000EBB4 CB-ARC READY CB ready signal for ARC
800000EBB5 ARC_MAIN_START For three-phase ARC start
800000EBB6 ARC_MAIN_COND For three-phase ARC condition
810000EBB7 ARC_SUB_START For three-phase ARC start (sub)
- 142 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.14 Voltage check for auto-reclose (VCHK)

The voltage-check-for-auto-reclose (VCHK) feature is used along with the auto-reclose
function (ARC), in order to safely restore service between the line and busbar following the
clearance of the fault. To implement ARC, synchronism between the incoming voltage and the
outgoing voltage is required for both the line and the busbar; that is, VCHK checks the
difference in the respective voltages and frequencies and permits the ARC operation of circuit
breaker (CB) for closure.
Bus-bar
CB (CB#1)
Line
ARC with
VCHK
Figure 2.14-1 ARC and VCHK in a single breaker system
The implementation of VCHK is a subject of the ARC function; hence, the setting of
VCHK should be in correspondence with the ARC setting. The ARC function is discussed
separately (See Chapter Relay application: Auto-reclose function)
2.14.1 Characteristic and elements

VCHK provides both voltage and synchronism check. Four relay elements (VCHK-OVB,
VCHK-OVL, VCHK-UVB, and VCHK-UVL) are used in the voltage check function. Two of the
relay elements VCHK-OVB and VCHK-OVL are used to verify the presence of voltage on the
busbar and the line respectively; the remaining two relay elements are used to verify the
unavailability of voltage on the busbar and line respectively.
(i) Voltage condition and check zone

Figure 2.14-2 shows four zones (A1 to D1) for voltage verification. For example, if VCHK-OVL
is active but VCHK-UVB is not active, VHCK determines that the Busbar is in the Dead
condition (no-voltage) and the Line is in the Live condition (existing voltage). This condition
holds true for A1 zone. If the voltage condition matches with the B1 zone, a synchronism
check is carried out by VCHK. Thus, it can be seen that a synchronism check is not carried out
for zones A1, C1 or D1.
- 143 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
VL Line voltage
(Incoming voltage)
Dead bus and Live bus and
live line live line
A1 (DB-LL) B1 (LB-LL)
VCHK-OVL
Dead bus and Live bus and

dead line dead line
(DB-DL) (LB-DL)
VCHK-UVL
C1 D1
VB Busbar voltage
0(V) VCHK-UVB VCHK-OVB (Running voltage)
A1, C1, D1: Voltage check

B1: Synchronism check
Figure 2.14-2 VCHK Check zones

Table 2.14-1 VCHK Voltage conditions
Voltage condition DB_LL LB_LL DB_DL LB_DL
Check zone A1 B1 C1 D1
Busbar voltage (VB) Dead Live Dead Live
Line voltage (VL) Live Live Dead Dead
2.14.2 Synchronism Scheme

VCHK has a measuring function, which checks the difference between a reference voltage and
an object voltage. The measuring function checks phase angles, voltages, and frequencies.
VCHK determines the synchronism based on the presence of voltage on both the Line and
Busbar, as shown in Figure 2.14-3.
θS = SYN1-Angle
VL
θs VB
θ
∆V
VCHK-OVB or
VCHK-OVL
a. VCHK1
Figure 2.14-3 VCHK characteristics
This function performs three checks: (1) voltage difference, (2) frequency difference, and
(3) phase difference. The following variables represent the algebraic expression used to
- 144 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
perform these checks:

VB = Busbar voltage
VL = Line voltage
ΔV = Voltage difference between Busbar and Line
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
f= slip cycle
Δf = frequency difference between bus and Line
θ= phase difference between VB and VL
SYN1-dV = Voltage difference setting [SYN1-dV]
VCHK-OVB = voltage setting for Bus-bar [VCHK-OVB]
VCHK-OVL = voltage setting for Line [VCHK-OVL]
SYN1-Angle = phase difference between VB and VL, set by [SYN-Angle]
SYN1-df = value of frequency difference between Bus-bar and Line, set by [SYN-df]
T_SYN1 = setting of synch check timer (second) [T_SYN]
Table 2.14-2 VCHK synchronism setting
Scheme switch Set Comment
SYN-dV 0 - 150 Difference voltage for checking SYN
SYN-df 0.01 - 2.00 Difference frequency for checking SYN
VCHK-OVL 10 - 150 Voltage for checking Live-Line
VCHK-UVL 10 - 150 Voltage for checking Dead-Line
SYN-Angle 0 - 75 Difference angle for checking SYN
SYN-df 0.01 - 2.00 Difference frequency for checking SYN
Voltage check time "SYN (Live-Bus, Live-Line
T_SYN 0.01 - 100.00
& Synchro-check)"
(i) Voltage difference

The voltage difference check function (SYN-dV) measures the difference between the bus
voltage (Running voltage, VB) and the Line voltage (Incoming voltage, VL). For the
implementation of SYN-dV, the following equation is used to calculate the difference and
setting required for VCHK:
VCHK-OVB ≤ VB
VCHK-OVL ≤ VL
ΔV = |VL − VB| ≤ SYN-dV
(ii) Frequency difference

The frequency difference (SYN-df) is the result of the difference in frequency between the
busbar and the line. The following equation is provided for SYN-df:
Δf = |fVL – fVB| ≤ SYN-df
- 145 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) Phase difference

The check function of the phase difference (SYN-Angle) determines the angular difference
between the busbar and the line. The following equation is used:
VB × VL cosθ ≥ 0
VB × VL sin (SYN-Angle) ≥ VB × VL sin θ
Note: VCHK can measure the slip cycle (frequency difference Δf) directly. When the phase
difference, corresponding to the setting [SYN-Angle] and the synchronism check
time setting [T_SYN], are provided, then Δf is not used. The maximum slip cycle is
defined by the following equation:
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆−𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
f=
180°×T_SYN
2.14.3 VCHK setting

As described earlier, when VCHK is applied, VCHK-OVB and VCHK-UVB check the voltage
of the busbar, and VCHK-OVL and VCHK-UVL check the voltage of the line. The line and
busbar voltages are obtained in the VCT1. Thus, the user should set the scheme switches
[SYN-VLine] and [SYN-VBus] in accordance with the phase(s) of the input-voltage(s). The
following are setting examples.
1Note: For more information on VCT, see Chapter Technical description: Transformer
module. For external connection, see Appendix: Typical external connection.
Table 2.14-3 VCHK line selection setting

Scheme switch Settings Comment
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V-L12 / V-L23 / Selection of Bus
SYN-VBus V-L31 / V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 / voltage(Running Voltage) for
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4 SYN
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V-L12 / V-L23 /
Selection of Line voltage
SYN-VLine V-L31 / V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3 /
(Incoming Voltage) for SYN
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4
- 146 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i) Setting example 1 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-A)
Line
VCT1
Line VT
(Phase-A)
VL1
VL1 (Va)
VL2 (Vb)
Busbar VT
(Three Phase)
Busbar
VL3 VL2
VL3 (Vc)
a. Phasor diagram for Line
V3 (Vs)
V3
V4 (Vs2) b. Phasor diagram for Busbar
V Line (V3)2
VBusbar (VL1)3
Figure 2.14-4 Example 1: Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for VCHK
1Note: The structure of the VCT is dependent on the VCT type. (See chapter
Technical description: Transformer module)
2 Note: V is the Running voltage.
Busbar
3Note: V is the Incoming voltage.
Line
Figure 2.14-4 shows the input voltages and phases available at the VCT from the line
and the busbar; it shows the phase relationship between the running voltage and the
incoming voltage. In this case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.14-4 and
Table 2.14-4.
Table 2.14-4 Setting for example 1
Output voltage at VT Busbar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-A
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage (VL1)= Phase-A (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (V3)= Phase-A (Line VT)
VCHK Setting4 [SYN-VBus] = V-L1
[SYN-VLine]= V3
4Note: As shown in Figure 2.14-4 (a) and (b), set V3 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine].
- 147 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
This is because V3 and VL1 have the same phase.
(ii) Setting example 2 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line1 VT=phase-BC)
Line VCT
Line VT
(Phase B-C)
VL1
VL1 (Va)
VL2 (Vb)
Busbar VT
VL3 VL2
(Three Phase)
Busbar
VL3 (Vc) VL23

a. Phasor diagram for Busbar
V3 (Vs) V3
b. Phasor diagram for Line1

V4 (Vs2)
V Line (V3)1
VBusbar (VL23)2
Bus-bar
Line
Similarly, Figure 2.14-5 shows the available input voltages and phases at the VCT from
the line and the bus-bar. In this case, the settings are configured in accordance with Figure
2.14-5 and Table 2.14-5.
Output voltage at VT Busbar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-BC
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage(VL2 VL3)= Phase-B and C (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (V3)= Phase-BC (Line VT)
VCHK Setting3 [SYN-VBus] = V-L23
[SYN-VLine]= V3
3Note: As shown in Figure 2.14-5, V3 is set for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is
- 148 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
because the resultant phase of VL2, VL3 and V3 is the same.
(iii) Setting example 3 (Bus-bar VT=Phase-C, Line VT= Three-phase)
Line
VCT
Line VT
(Three phase)
VL1 (Va) VL1
VL2 (Vb)
Busbar VT
(Phase C) VL3
Busbar
VL2
VL3 (Vc)
a. Phasor diagram for line 1
V3 (Vs) V3
b. Phasor diagram for Bus-bar

V4 (Vs2)
V Line (VL3)1
VBusbar (V3)2
Busbar
Line
If three-phase voltages are provided as the incoming voltage, the configuration of the
input voltages and phases is as shown in Figure 2.14-6. In this case, the settings are
configured in accordance with Figure 2.14-6 and Table 2.14-6.
Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Phase-C
Line VT= Three phase
Input voltage at VCT Running voltage (V3)= Phase-C (Busbar VT)
Incoming voltage (VL3)= Phsse-C (Line VT)
VCHK Setting [SYN-VBus] = V3
[SYN-VLine]= V-L31
1Note: As shown in Figure 2.14-6, set V-L3 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is
- 149 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
because V3 and VL3 have the same phase.
2.14.4 Scheme and activation

VCHK issues output signals to the ARC with the results of the voltage check and synchronism
check as described earlier. The energizing control scheme of VCHK is drawn in Figure 2.14-7,
the output signal ARC1-VCHK is fed to ARC1 when one or more of the following conditions
are established: (1) VCHK runs, (2) OVB and UVL run, or (3) UVB and OVL run. The
activation of VCHK is controlled using the scheme switches: [ARC-SYN1] [ARC-LB_DL],
[ARC-DB_LL], and [ARC-DB_DL]. For example, DB_LL in Table 2.14-1 is only the criteria for
ARC operation, On is set for the scheme switch [ARC-DB_LL] while Off is set for the other
scheme switches. As a result, the system is energized in the direction from line to bus with
ARC.
If the user wishes to use the ARC function without the VCHK operation, set the scheme
switch [ARC-NOVCHK] On. (When the mode “TPAR” is to be selected in the ARC function, the
user can choice the ARC operation that is in accordance with the result of the VCHK function
or not.)
8200011B62 OVB T_LB_DL
OVB 8000011B6D
t 0
&
&
8000011B23
0.01-100.00S
ARC-LB_DL ON ≥1 ARC-VCHK
8000011B63
T_DB_LL
UVB 8100011B6E
& t 0
&
0.01-100.00S
ARC-DB_LL ON
8300011B60 OVL
OVL
8C00011B67 T_OVL3P 8F00011B6F

L1 t 0 VCHK_OVL3P†
8D00011B68 &
OVL L2
8E00011B69 0.01-100.00S
L3
T_DB_DL
8100011B61 UVL 8200011B70
& t 0
UVL &
0.01-100.00S
ARC-DB_DL ON
8300011B71
OVB
T_SYN1 8300011B72
& t 0 &
OVL
0.01-100.00S ARC-SYN1 ON
8400011B64
SYN1-dƟ
8500011B65 ARC-NOVCHK ON
SYN1-dV
8600011B66
SYN1-df
Figure 2.14-7 VCHK Logic

†Note: Signal “VCHK_OVL3P” is used when the user wishes to check the existence of
respective phase-voltages on the line.
- 150 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.14.5 Setting
Setting of ARC(Function ID: 4A8001)
Range Default setting value
1CB system
1CB system V-Bus ：Input
V-Bus ：Input from from
Note
Units
Setting items 1A 5A Contents three-phase voltage representative
s
rating rating V-Line：Input from phase voltage
representative phase V-Line：Input from
voltage three-phase
voltage
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
/ V-L12 / V-L23 /
Select a set from
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Bus voltage(Running Voltage)
SYN-VBus - V-L1, V-L2, V-L3, V3 (Fixed setting)
V2-L2 / V2-L3 / for SYN
V-L12, V-L23, V-L31
V2-L12 / V2-L23 /
V2-L31 / V3 / V4
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
/ V-L12 / V-L23 / Select a set from
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Line voltage (Incoming Voltage) V-L1, V-L2, V-L3,
SYN-VLine - V3 (Fixed setting)
V2-L2 / V2-L3 / for SYN V-L12, V-L23,
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V-L31
V2-L31 / V3 / V4
VCHK-OVB 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Live-Bus 51
VCHK-UVB 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Dead-Bus 13
VCHK-OVL 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Live-Line 51
VCHK-UVL 10 - 150 V Voltage for the checking Dead-Line 13
SYN-Angle 0 - 75 deg Difference angle for SYN check 30
SYN-dV 0 - 150 V Difference voltage for SYN check 150
SYN-df 0.01 - 2.00 Hz Difference frequency for SYN check 1.00
Voltage check "Live-Bus & Dead-Line" is

ARC-LB_DL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "Dead-Bus & Live-Line" is
ARC-DB_LL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "Dead-Bus & Dead-Line" is
ARC-DB_DL Off / On - Off
applied to ARC1
Voltage check "SYN(Live-Bus & Live-Line &
ARC-SYN Off / On - Off
Synchronism check)" is applied to ARC
ARC-NOVCH
Off / On - Voltage check is not applied to ARC On
K
Voltage check time "Live-Bus and
T_LB_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Bus and
T_DB_LL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Live-Line"
Voltage check time "Dead-Bus and
T_DB_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
Dead-Line"
Voltage check time "SYN1(Live-Bus &
T_SYN1 0.01 - 100.00 s 1.00
Live-Line & Synchronism check)"
T_OVL3P 0.01 - 100.00 s Voltage check time "Live-line" 0.05
- 151 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.14.6 Data ID
VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001)
8300011B60 OVL OVL relay element operated
8100011B61 UVL UVL relay element operated
8200011B62 OVB OVB relay element operated
8000011B63 UVB UVB relay element operated
8400011B64 SYN-Angle SYN-Angle relay element operated
8500011B65 SYN-dV SYN-dV relay element operated
8600011B66 SYN-df SYN-df relay element operated
8C00011B67 OVL-L1 OVL relay element operated (phase-L1)
8D00011B68 OVL-L2 OVL relay element operated (phase-L2)
8E00011B69 OVL-L3 OVL relay element operated (phase-L3)
8700011B6A SYN-Angle zero SYN Angle check(zero)
8800011B6B SYN-Angle loss SYN Angle check(loss)
8B00011B6C SYN-V5per SYN Voltage check(V5per)
8000011B6D VCHK_LB-DL Voltage check(Live Bus & Dead Line)
8100011B6E VCHK_DB_LL Voltage check(Dead Bus & Live Line)
8F00011B6F VCHK_OVL3P Voltage check(Live 3phase Line)
8200011B70 VCHK_DB-DL Voltage check(Dead Bus & Dead Line)
8300011B72 VCHK_SYN Synchronous voltage (after timer)
8000011B23 ARC-VCHK Voltage check for auto-reclose
- 152 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15 Protection common (PROT_COMMON)

The decision of Protection common function (PROT_COMMON) is used in a number of other
protection functions. This function decides the contact state of the circuit breaker (CB) and
the disconnector (DS). This function also examines whether a line is dead (de-energizing). In
order to examine it, the PROT_COMMON has an under-voltage detection (UV) relay. The
PROT_COMMON is used as a common part of the protection functions.
2.15.1 Decision of CB open/close status

CB auxiliary-contact consists of a normal-open contact (N/O) and a normal-close contact (N/C).
For example, the signals of N/O and N/C of CB#1 in phase-A are represented such as
“CB1-A_NO_CONT” and “CB1-A_NC_CONT” respectively in the logic of PROT_COMM.
When these signals appear in this logic, the CB state can be decided whether it is open or
close.
(i) Selection of breaker system

When the PROT_COMMON is used in a single breaker system (1CB), 1CB is set for the
scheme switch [CB-System]. When this function is used in a single-and-a-half breaker system
(1.5CB), 2CB is set for this scheme switch.
(ii) Signal selection

CB state is determined using N/O and N/C signals. The PROT_COMMON allows the user to
select whether the CB state is decided by N/O or N/C. For example, if the PROT_COMMON
should decide the CB state with N/O only, NO is set for the scheme switch [CB*-Contact]1.
Conversely, if the PROT_COMMON should decide the CB state with N/C only, NC is set for
this scheme switch.
When both N/O and the N/C are required to decide the CB state, set Both for the scheme
switch [CB*-Contact]1.
1Note: When the PROT_COMMON is used in the 1CB system, set the scheme switch
[CB1-Contact]. When the PROT_COMMON is used in the 1.5CB system, set the
scheme switches [CB1-Contact] and [CB2-Contact].
(iii) Contact supervision

Table 2.15-1 shows the relationship between the main contact and the auxiliary contact in the
CB. For example, when the main contact is open, N/O and N/C are represented as open and
close respectively. However, if both N/O and N/C are represented as open when the main
contact is open, the status information from the CB is incorrect. This function checks the
contact state in accordance with Table 2.15-1.
- 153 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 2.15-1 Main and Auxiliary contacts in CB and its state

Main contact
OPEN CLOSE
N/O OPEN CLOSE
Auxiliary contacts
N/C CLOSE OPEN
Set On for the scheme switch [CB-SV] when contact supervision is required. Enter the
time of supervision for the setting [TCBSV]. The supervision period has to be set between 0 to
100 seconds.
(iv) Logic
Figure 2.15-1 and Figure 2.15-2 show the decision logic of the PROT_COMMON and outputs
the decision state of the CB: CB-A_CLOSE, CB-B_CLOSE, and CB-C_CLOSE; or
CB-A_OPEN, CB-B_ OPEN, and CB-C_ OPEN.
- 154 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
CB1-A-NO
800000EBB0 CB1-A_NO_CONT &
≥1
CB1-A-NC ≥1 CB-A_CLOSE
800000EBB7 CB1-A_NC_CONT 1 &
CB1-B-NO
810000EBB1 CB1-B_NO_CONT
&
CB1-B-NC ≥1 CB-B_CLOSE
810000EBB8 CB1-B_NC_CONT 1 ≥1
&
CB1-C-NO
820000EBB02 CB1-C_NO_CONT
CB1-C-NC &
≥1 ≥1 CB-C_CLOSE
820000EBB9 CB1-C_NC_CONT 1
&
&
≥1 CB-ALLPH_CLOSE
≥1
NO &
NC
≥1
CB1-Contact Both
CB1-CONTACT=BOTH
CB2-A_CLOSE
CB2-A-NO
CB2-B_CLOSE
840000EBB3 CB2-A_NO_CONT
CB2-C_CLOSE
CB2-A-NC
840000EBBA CB2-A_NC_CONT
CB2-ALLPH_CLOSE
CB2-B-NO
CB2-A_OPEN
850000EBB4 CB2-B_NO_CONT CB-A_OPEN
CB2-B_OPEN &
CB2-B-NC CB2-C_OPEN
850000EBBB CB2-B_NC_CONT CB2-ALLPH_OPEN
CB2-C-NO Note: CB2 logic is similar CB-B_OPEN

&
860000EBB5 CB2-C_NO_CONT to CB1 logic; OPEN
signals are TRUE (1) and
CB2-C-NC CLOSE signals are
860000EBBC CB2-C_NC_CONT
FALSE (0) when this logic & CB-C_OPEN
is used in 1CB system.
& CB-ALLPH_OPEN
≥1
&
NO
NC ≥1
≥1 & CB-ANYPH_CLOSE
≥1
CB2-Contact Both
&
t 0
& CB-LOSS_PHASE
0.03s
CB2-CONTACT=BOTH
1CB CB-SYSTEM=1CB
CB-System
2CB CB-SYSTEM=2CB
Figure 2.15-1 Decision logic for CB operation
- 155 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
CB1-A-NO TCBSV 8000001B93

=1 1
& t 0
CB1-A_FAIL
CB1-A-NC
CB1-B-NO 8100001B94
=1 t 0
1 & CB1-B_FAIL
CB1-B-NC
CB1-C-NO
8200001B95
=1 t 0
1 CB1-C_FAIL
CB1-C-NC &
0-100S
8300001B96
CB1-CONTACT=BOTH
& ≥1 CB1-FAIL
CB2-A-NO TCBSV 8400001B97

=1 1 & t 0
CB2-A_FAIL
CB2-A-NC
CB2-B-NO 8500001B98
=1 t 0
1 CB2-B_FAIL
&
CB2-B-NC
CB2-C-NO 8600001B99
=1 t 0
1 CB2-C_FAIL
&
CB2-C-NC
0-100S
8700001B9A
CB2-CONTACT=BOTH
& CB2-FAIL
≥1
CB-SV
On
Figure 2.15-2 Supervise logic for CB
- 156 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15.2 Decision of DS open/close status

PROT_COMMON can determine the behavior and position status of a DS. Signal
configuration and settings for DS position status are similar to that of CB. Note that
PROT_COMMON can only provide this function for DS.
(i) Signal selection

Set either NO, NC, or Both for scheme switch [DS-Contact].
(ii) Contact supervision

When Both is set for scheme switch [DS-Contact], the auxiliary switch contact state of the DS
is supervised. Set On for scheme switch [DS-SV] when contact supervision is required. The
supervision period has to be set between 0 to 100 seconds for the setting [TDSSV].
(iii) Logic
Figure 2.15-3 shows the logic used to determine DS status and generates the output signal of
the DS state: DS_CLOSE or DS_OPEN.
DS-NO
DS-NC
8C0000EBB6 DS NO CONT & 8E00001B85
≥1 DS_CLOSE
8C0000EBBD DS NC CONT 1 &
8F00001B86
1 DS_OPEN
≥1
NO
DS-Contact NC ≥1
Both
DS-CONTACT=BOTH
Figure 2.15-3 Scheme logic to determine DS status
Figure 2.15-4 shows the supervision scheme logic to supervise the status of the DS auxiliary
switch contacts. This scheme logic is applied when BOTH is set for the scheme switch
[DS-Contact].
TDSSV 8C00001B9B
DS-NO
=1 1 t 0
& DS-FAIL
DS-NC
0-100S
DS-CONTACT=BOTH
DS-SV On &
Figure 2.15-4 Supervise scheme logic for DS
- 157 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15.3 Dead line detection

The dead line detection (DLD) determinates whether the line is out-of-service or not. The
absence of three-phase voltage is required when all CBs are open, the output signal of the
DLD is required to check the absence of voltage. The DLD operation is carried out with (i)
under-voltage relay (UV), (ii) decision logic of CB operation.
(i) Under-voltage relay

The UV relay is made up of two elements: a phase-to-phase (UVLS) element and a
phase-to-ground (UVLG) element. UV is used for the detection of the dead line. The UV
element has a scheme switch [DLDbyUV] and On is set for UV element operation.
(ii) Decision of CB operation

The dead line state is determined by the CB position. When this feature is required, set On for
the scheme switch [DLDbyCB].
(iii) Detection time

The period for DLD detection should be set using the setting [TDSSV], the value of the
detection time can be set between 0 to 100 seconds.
(iv) Logic
Figure 2.15-4 shows the scheme logic for the detection of an under voltage condition.
- 158 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8000001B60
A UVLG-A
UVLG B
C
8100001B61
UVLG-B
8200001B62
UVLG-C
≥1 UVLG-OR
& UVLG-AND
8400001B63
AB UVLS-AB
UVLS BC
CA
8500001B64
UVLS-BC
8600001B65
UVLS-CA
≥1 UVLS-OR
& UVLS-AND
Figure 2.15-4 Scheme logic for under voltage detection
Figure 2.15-5 shows the detection logic used to determine whether the line is dead or not. The
UVLG and the UVLS signals shown in Figure 2.15-4 are used for the detection of a dead line.
UVLG-A
UVLG-B
TDLD 8000001B9C
UVLG-C & t 0
& ≥1 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
UVLS-AB t 0
UVLS-BC
0.00-300.00S
UVLS-CA
DLDbyUV On
CB_ALLPH_OPEN
DLDbyCB On &
Figure 2.15-5 Scheme logic for detection of dead line
- 159 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15.4 Detection of current change (OCD)

(i) Current change detection relay
When there is a difference between the present current vector (IM) and a previous current
vector (IN), and if the difference is larger than the setting, the OCD function will operate. IN is
measured two-cycles before and the difference is derived from the following equation:
|𝐼𝐼𝑀𝑀 − 𝐼𝐼𝑁𝑁 | > 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 (2.15-1)
where, determination of the operating value is given by Is.
Since the operating level is determined by the adjustment of Is, setting [OCD] is provided and
a value of 0.05 to 0.20 A (1 A rating) or 0.25 to 1.00 A (5 A rating) is applied.
IN
Figure 2.15-6 Current change detection
(ii) Logic of OCD

Figure 2.15-7 shows the OCD logic and its output signals.
8000001B66 8000001B6F
A 0 t OCD-A
OCD B 0.1S
C
8100001B67 8100001B70
0 t OCD-B
0.1S
8200001B68 8200001B71
0 t OCD-C
0.1S
Figure 2.15-7 Scheme logic for current change check
- 160 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15.5 Setting
Setting of PROT_COMMON (Function ID: 48A001)
Setting item 1A 5A Units Contents 1A 5A Notes
UVLS 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-phase relay operating value 77.0
UV phase-ground relay operating

UVLG 5.0 - 130.0 V 45.0
value
0.05 - 0.25 -
OCD A OCD relay operating value 0.10 0.50
0.20 1.00
CB
Single CB or One-and-a-half CB
CB-System 1CB / 2CB - 1CB
system
Kind of injected CB contact

CB1-Contact NO / NC / Both - Normally open contact, Normally close NO
contact or Both.
Kind of injected CB2 contact
CB2-Contact NO / NC / Both - Normally open contact, Normally close NO
contact or Both contact.
CB-SV Off / On - CB contact supervisor enable Off
TCBSV 0 - 100 s CB contact supervisor time 10
Kind of injected DS contact

DS
DS-Contact NO / NC / Both - Normally open contact, Normally close NO

contact or Both contact.
DS-SV Off / On - DS contact super visor enable Off
TDSSV 0 - 100 s DS contact super visor time 60

Dead-line detection
DLDbyUV Off / On - Dead line detection by under voltage Off
DLDbyCB Off / On - Dead line detection by CB open Off
TDLD 0.00 - 300.00 s Dead line detection timer 10.00
- 161 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2.15.6 Data ID
PROT_COMMON(48A001)
8000001B60 UVLG-A UVLG relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001B61 UVLG-B UVLG relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001B62 UVLG-C UVLG relay element operated (phase-C)
8400001B63 UVLS-AB UVLS relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500001B64 UVLS-BC UVLS relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600001B65 UVLS-CA UVLS relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000001B66 OCD-A OCD relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001B67 OCD-B OCD relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001B68 OCD-C OCD relay element operated (phase-C)
8000001B6F OCD-AT OCD relay with off-delay timer (phase-A)
8100001B70 OCD-BT OCD relay with off-delay timer (phase-B)
8200001B71 OCD-CT OCD relay with off-delay timer (phase-C)
8000001B73 CB1-A_CLOSE CB1 phase-A closed
8100001B74 CB1-B_CLOSE CB1 phase-B closed
8200001B75 CB1-C_CLOSE CB1 phase-C closed
8000001B7C CB2-A_CLOSE CB2 phase-A closed
8100001B7D CB2-B_CLOSE CB2 phase-B closed
8200001B7E CB2-C_CLOSE CB2 phase-C closed
8E00001B85 DS_CLOSE DS closed
8F00001B86 DS_OPEN DS opened
8300001B8B CB_ALLPH_CLOSE CB all phase closed
8700001B8F CB_ALLPH_OPEN CB all phase opened
8800001B90 CB_ANYPH_CLOSE CB any phase closed
8900001B91 CB_LOSS_PHASE CB loss of phase condition
8300001B96 CB1_FAIL CB1 contact fail
8700001B9A CB2_FAIL CB2 contact fail
8C00001B9B DS_FAIL DS contact fail
8000001B9C DEAD_LINE_DETECT Dead line detection

Prot_Common(48A001)
800000EBB0 CB1-A_NO_CONT CB1-A normally open contact
810000EBB1 CB1-B_NO_CONT CB1-B normally open contact
820000EBB2 CB1-C_NO_CONT CB1-C normally open contact
840000EBB3 CB2-A_NO_CONT CB2-A normally open contact
850000EBB4 CB2-B_NO_CONT CB2-B normally open contact
860000EBB5 CB2-C_NO_CONT CB2-C normally open contact
8C0000EBB6 DS_NO_CONT DS normally open contact
800000EBB7 CB1-A_NC_CONT CB1-A normally close contact
810000EBB8 CB1-B_NC_CONT CB1-B normally close contact
820000EBB9 CB1-C_NC_CONT CB1-C normally close contact
840000EBBA CB2-A_NC_CONT CB2-A normally close contact
- 162 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

Prot_Common(48A001)
850000EBBB CB2-B_NC_CONT CB2-B normally close contact
860000EBBC CB2-C_NC_CONT CB2-C normally close contact
8C0000EBBD DS_NC_CONT DS normally close contact
830000EBBE CB1_NO_CONT CB1 normally open contact
830000EBBF CB1_NC_CONT CB1 normally close contact
- 163 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3 Control and monitoring application
- 164 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.1 Local, remote and PLC control

The user can select either local or remote control by pressing L│ R key on the IED front
panel. Its selection is carried out in the LOCRMT function. Control logics are provided as
defaults, but the user can customize them using the PLC function and PLC connection points.
The LOCRMT function is applied in all IEDs generally.
LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001) LRSW01_LR_ST
From key input function (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local
S
L/R CHANGE & “True” means Local,
R 1≥ “False” means Remote
Local to remote
&
53000 13109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST
1≥
&
Over the count up timer
(approximately 35 min)
Disable default logic
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265

Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 3.1-1 LOCRMT logic
(i) Local control

“Local control” represents the user’s operation at the IED. Either the DIR or the SBO control
is available dependent upon the configuration.
(ii) Remote control

Controlling by SAS at remote represents “Remote control”. It runs with the assistance of the
communication protocol. Either the DIR or the SBO controls are available; it depends on the
configuration made by the user. Note that parameters in control commands are defined by
international standards or manufactures†. The parameter details are shown as the
communication profile. (See Chapter Communication protocol and Appendixes)
†Note:As a rule, the control command has parameters. For example, “Off to On” and “On
to Off” control directions in commands are pre-configured as parameters in
communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary in respective protocols,
which are referred such as IEC61850, Modbus and others. For the IEC61850, Table
3.1-1 shows defined parameters: control direction is ruled in “ctlVal”, command
publisher is recognized with “origin” parameter. For more information about the
parameters, see Appendix IEC61850 MICS and PICS.
- 165 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 3.1-1 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2

Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
orgin Indicator of command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time of sending command
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
(iii) Programmable logic control (PLC)

Programmable logic control (PLC) function can provide user-preferred control schemes.
Several control functions have connection points for the PLC function; they can create a
user-preferred control scheme. The user is practically required to program PLC logics for the
connection. The user should use automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function in order to start
the user-preferred control scheme, as shown in Figure 3.1-2. For more details of PLC
programming, refer to Chapter PLC function.
ASEQ User’s PLC SPOS User’s PLC DPOS

logic logic
PLC monitoring PLC connection

point point
Figure 3.1-2 An example of user-preferred control scheme made with user’s PLC logic
Note: The user-preferred control scheme made by users is operated only in the DIR
mode.
- 166 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv) Data ID for Local/Remote control

Note: The user should notice the following meanings in the column “M/O” in each table:
“O” means the signal is provided for the optional usage.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may face an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.1-2 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)

Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHANGE [L/R] key “push” N/A
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 Disable condition by PLC O
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 User configuarable condition by PLC O
Table 3.1-3 Mapping points for LOCRMT

Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “oroginator” in IEC61850 N/A
530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “oroginator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 3.1-4 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

Signal Number Signal Name Description
530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)
530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x80) / Remote(0x40) status (double bit expression)
- 167 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.2 Trip LED reset function (LRST)

The IED has a number of LEDs1 on the front panel, LED “TRIP” is provided as an indicator
for trip operation. Operation of the “TRIP” LED is initiated by the protection (relay) function
within the IED. As this LED is lit after the completion of the trip operation, resetting of the
LED has to be done externally; three methods are provided to turn off this LED:
1. [CLEAR] key: There are a number of operation keys2 on the IED, the CLEAR
key initiates turning off the LED. Note this key turns off all of the LEDs.
2. GR-TIEMS: This is and engineering tool which is provided with a feature to
turn off the LEDs. (For details on how to use TIEMS, see the separate
instruction manual for GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082).
3. Server (SAS): This LED can be turned off from an SAS at a remote site.
The LRST function is activated when On is set for scheme switch [LEDDR1-EN].
1Note: For details of the IED LEDs, see Chapter User interface: Outline: LEDs.
2Note: For the function of the operation keys, see Chapter User interface: Operation keys.
- 168 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.2.1 Setting
Setting of LEDR (Function ID: 528001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
3.2.2 Data ID
LRST(Function ID: 528001)
5280018007011D53 LEDR01_SC LEDR01 select command
5280018007011D57 LEDR01_EC LEDR01 execute command
5280018007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS LEDR01 select command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC LEDR01 select command by RCC
5280018007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS LEDR01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC LEDR01 execute command by RCC
5280018207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV LEDR01 signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
5280018607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA002
5280018B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
5280018F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC002

LRST(Function ID: 528001)
820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
- 169 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.3 Mode control function (MDCTRL)

The function of mode control (MDCTRL) is to provide an interface for test function block
(TSET-FB). With this interface, a mode change command of the IED is made for TEST-FB.
3.3.1 State monitor of TEST-FB

MDCTRL can monitor the state change (On or Off) of the TEST-FB. To use this monitoring
function, On should be set for scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to operation. During
MDCTRL operation, a selection signal and an execution signal are provided for the TEST-FB;
hence, MDCTRL comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a
time-out timer for selection cancel; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
execution cancel.
3.3.2 Interface for IEC 61850

MDCTRL can fulfil the two operation modes (on and test) specified in IEC 61850, as shown in
Table 3.3-1. In terms of communication, MDCTRL can transmit the switching signal for the
TEST-FB via the selection and control logic. This switching signal is initiated by the mode
change command that is received at the common communication interface in the IED. Since
control operation from a server only is considered, its operation from the HMI of the IED is
not provided.
Table 3.3-1 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
1 On The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values.
3 Test The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be accepted
only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as valid” means
that the application should react in the manner what is foreseen for
“test”.
- 170 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.3.3 Setting
Setting of MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for operation Off
MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out 30
timer
3.3.4 Data ID
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 07
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 03
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signal check
- 171 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011F55 MODE01_EC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 execute command mode err
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal

8313002F52 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16
821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
- 172 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.4 General Pulse Counter Function (GCNT)

When an IED PLC function produces a pulse signal, the general pulse counter (GCNT)
function counts the pulses. The GCNT monitors a running signal, and counts the number of
ON states from the signal. GCNT01 to GCNTxx† are provided to count up to five signals. The
GCNT function consists of measurement and correction features; the measurement feature
increments the counter number, whereas the correction feature allows the placement of an
arbitrary number into the counter when adjustment is required.
†Note:The number of the GCNT functions depends on the IED model.
3.4.1 Measurement
The GCNT function checks the PLC signal generated every 100ms, and increments the
counter when the signal changes from the OFF to ON state. Since the number counted is
stored in non-volatile memory, the number counted is stored in the IED when it is out of
service, and the GCNT function restarts along with the stored data when the IED is back in
service.
Figure 3.4-1 shows a pulse signal, the pulse is provided with OFF (0) and ON (1). For
example, the GCNT01 function counts when ON (1) is observed when On is set for the scheme
switch [GCNT01-CNTS]. When Off is set for this scheme switch, the GCNT01 function counts
when OFF (0) is observed. When OnOff is set for this scheme switch, the GCNT01 function
counts when both OFF (0) and ON (1) are observed. If the counter reaches the maximum
number of measurements, the counter is overridden and starts to count from either zero or
one (rollover). Either zero or one for the rollover is set with scheme switch [CNTRV]. (For
setting of this [CNTRV], see Chapter Control and monitor: Common control setting)
1
0
ON 1 2 3
OFF 1 2 3
OnOff 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 3.4-1 Pulse signal and setting of counter
When operation of this measurement is not required in the GCNT01, set NA for the
scheme switch [GCNT01-CNTS].
The operation of GCNT02 to GCNT05 are similar to the operation of GCNT01.
- 173 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.4.2 Counter correction

The user can correct the counter value in each counter. When counter correction is required,
the user can place an arbitrary number into each counter from a server. The operation of the
HMI also enables changing of the counter value. So does GR-TIEMS. (For the operation of
GR-TIEMS, see the separate instruction manual specifically for GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082).
3.4.3 Counter Renewal

As noted earlier, every counter revises its number when the signal state changes. The IED
screen and GR-TIEMS periodically display the counter value for each counter.
However, a server will not display the counter value promptly. That is, the user cannot
see the actual counter value at the SAS until the counter has exceeded the step value. The
step value is produced by subtracting the past counter value from the current counter value;
when the step value is greater than a predetermined setting, the GCNT function sends the
new counter value to the SAS. For example, GCNT01 is provided with setting [GCNT01-SDB].
- 174 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.4.4 Setting
Setting list of GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting device Units Contents Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
G_CNT CNT1 GCNT01-EN Off / On Counter1 Enable Off
GCNT01-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
GCNT01-SDB 0-999 none Counter1 Sending Dead Band 0
Return value at counter roll

GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9-2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT01-HMI Off/On Counter1 for HMI Off
CNT2 GCNT02-EN Off / On Counter2 Enable Off
GCNT02-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
GCNT02-SDB 0-999 none Counter2 Sending Dead Band 0

GCNT02-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT02-CNTMAX 9-2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT02-HMI Off/On Counter2 for HMI Off
CNTxx GCNTxx-EN Off / On Counterxx Enable Off
GCNTxx-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counterxx Sending Dead

GCNTxx-SDB 0-999 none 0
Band
GCNTxx-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNTxx-CNTMAX 9-2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNTxx-HMI Off/On Counterxx for HMI Off
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 to GGNTxx because the setting items are the same except the
device number.
3.4.5 Data ID
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
800e00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800e01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 plc signal
- 175 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

800e0aEDE0 GCNT10_PLC_SGNL GCNT10 plc signal
800e0bEDE0 GCNT11_PLC_SGNL GCNT11 plc signal
800e0cEDE0 GCNT12_PLC_SGNL GCNT12 plc signal
800e0dEDE0 GCNT13_PLC_SGNL GCNT13 plc signal
800e0eEDE0 GCNT14_PLC_SGNL GCNT14 plc signal
800e0fEDE0 GCNT15_PLC_SGNL GCNT15 plc signal
800e1aEDE0 GCNT26_PLC_SGNL GCNT26 plc signal
800e1bEDE0 GCNT27_PLC_SGNL GCNT27 plc signal
800e1cEDE0 GCNT28_PLC_SGNL GCNT28 plc signal
800e1dEDE0 GCNT29_PLC_SGNL GCNT29 plc signal
800e1eEDE0 GCNT30_PLC_SGNL GCNT30 plc signal
800e1fEDE0 GCNT31_PLC_SGNL GCNT31 plc signal

800e001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800e001D5C GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800e001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
800e001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800e001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
800e001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800e001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800e001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
890e011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0e011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
- 176 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

820e011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
830e011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
840e011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
- 177 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

890e0a1EA2 GCNT10_CTR_SGUCN GCNT10 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0a1E76 GCNT10_SLD_CSCN GCNT10 selected condition signal
8B0e0a1E7B GCNT10_SLF_CSCN GCNT10 select fail condition signal
820e0a1E84 GCNT10_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT10 execute command OK condition signal
830e0a1E8B GCNT10_EC_F_CSCN GCNT10 execute command fail condition signal
840e0a1E95 GCNT10_CC_SSCN GCNT10 cancel success signal
890e0b1EA2 GCNT11_CTR_SGUCN GCNT11 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0b1E76 GCNT11_SLD_CSCN GCNT11 selected condition signal
8B0e0b1E7B GCNT11_SLF_CSCN GCNT11 select fail condition signal
820e0b1E84 GCNT11_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT11 execute command OK condition signal
830e0b1E8B GCNT11_EC_F_CSCN GCNT11 execute command fail condition signal
840e0b1E95 GCNT11_CC_SSCN GCNT11 cancel success signal
890e0c1EA2 GCNT12_CTR_SGUCN GCNT12 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0c1E76 GCNT12_SLD_CSCN GCNT12 selected condition signal
8B0e0c1E7B GCNT12_SLF_CSCN GCNT12 select fail condition signal
820e0c1E84 GCNT12_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT12 execute command OK condition signal
830e0c1E8B GCNT12_EC_F_CSCN GCNT12 execute command fail condition signal
840e0c1E95 GCNT12_CC_SSCN GCNT12 cancel success signal
890e0d1EA2 GCNT13_CTR_SGUCN GCNT13 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0d1E76 GCNT13_SLD_CSCN GCNT13 selected condition signal
8B0e0d1E7B GCNT13_SLF_CSCN GCNT13 select fail condition signal
820e0d1E84 GCNT13_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT13 execute command OK condition signal
830e0d1E8B GCNT13_EC_F_CSCN GCNT13 execute command fail condition signal
840e0d1E95 GCNT13_CC_SSCN GCNT13 cancel success signal
890e0e1EA2 GCNT14_CTR_SGUCN GCNT14 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0e1E76 GCNT14_SLD_CSCN GCNT14 selected condition signal
8B0e0e1E7B GCNT14_SLF_CSCN GCNT14 select fail condition signal
820e0e1E84 GCNT14_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT14 execute command OK condition signal
830e0e1E8B GCNT14_EC_F_CSCN GCNT14 execute command fail condition signal
840e0e1E95 GCNT14_CC_SSCN GCNT14 cancel success signal
890e0f1EA2 GCNT15_CTR_SGUCN GCNT15 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e0f1E76 GCNT15_SLD_CSCN GCNT15 selected condition signal
8B0e0f1E7B GCNT15_SLF_CSCN GCNT15 select fail condition signal
820e0f1E84 GCNT15_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT15 execute command OK condition signal
830e0f1E8B GCNT15_EC_F_CSCN GCNT15 execute command fail condition signal
840e0f1E95 GCNT15_CC_SSCN GCNT15 cancel success signal
- 178 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

- 179 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

890e1a1EA2 GCNT26_CTR_SGUCN GCNT26 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1a1E76 GCNT26_SLD_CSCN GCNT26 selected condition signal
8B0e1a1E7B GCNT26_SLF_CSCN GCNT26 select fail condition signal
820e1a1E84 GCNT26_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT26 execute command OK condition signal
830e1a1E8B GCNT26_EC_F_CSCN GCNT26 execute command fail condition signal
840e1a1E95 GCNT26_CC_SSCN GCNT26 cancel success signal
890e1b1EA2 GCNT27_CTR_SGUCN GCNT27 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1b1E76 GCNT27_SLD_CSCN GCNT27 selected condition signal
8B0e1b1E7B GCNT27_SLF_CSCN GCNT27 select fail condition signal
820e1b1E84 GCNT27_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT27 execute command OK condition signal
830e1b1E8B GCNT27_EC_F_CSCN GCNT27 execute command fail condition signal
840e1b1E95 GCNT27_CC_SSCN GCNT27 cancel success signal
890e1c1EA2 GCNT28_CTR_SGUCN GCNT28 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1c1E76 GCNT28_SLD_CSCN GCNT28 selected condition signal
8B0e1c1E7B GCNT28_SLF_CSCN GCNT28 select fail condition signal
820e1c1E84 GCNT28_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT28 execute command OK condition signal
830e1c1E8B GCNT28_EC_F_CSCN GCNT28 execute command fail condition signal
840e1c1E95 GCNT28_CC_SSCN GCNT28 cancel success signal
890e1d1EA2 GCNT29_CTR_SGUCN GCNT29 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1d1E76 GCNT29_SLD_CSCN GCNT29 selected condition signal
8B0e1d1E7B GCNT29_SLF_CSCN GCNT29 select fail condition signal
820e1d1E84 GCNT29_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT29 execute command OK condition signal
830e1d1E8B GCNT29_EC_F_CSCN GCNT29 execute command fail condition signal
840e1d1E95 GCNT29_CC_SSCN GCNT29 cancel success signal
890e1e1EA2 GCNT30_CTR_SGUCN GCNT30 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1e1E76 GCNT30_SLD_CSCN GCNT30 selected condition signal
8B0e1e1E7B GCNT30_SLF_CSCN GCNT30 select fail condition signal
820e1e1E84 GCNT30_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT30 execute command OK condition signal
830e1e1E8B GCNT30_EC_F_CSCN GCNT30 execute command fail condition signal
- 180 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

840e1e1E95 GCNT30_CC_SSCN GCNT30 cancel success signal
890e1f1EA2 GCNT31_CTR_SGUCN GCNT31 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0e1f1E76 GCNT31_SLD_CSCN GCNT31 selected condition signal
8B0e1f1E7B GCNT31_SLF_CSCN GCNT31 select fail condition signal
820e1f1E84 GCNT31_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT31 execute command OK condition signal
830e1f1E8B GCNT31_EC_F_CSCN GCNT31 execute command fail condition signal
840e1f1E95 GCNT31_CC_SSCN GCNT31 cancel success signal
- 181 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
3.5 Common control setting

The control and monitoring function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: Scheme switch [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of
SPOS, DPOS and TPOS. If required the SPOS, DPOS and TPOS
can be in the same control direction, set On for scheme switch
[SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in
case of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set by
[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined limited
time, the selection is canceled. The limited time can be set using
[TSC] between 30 and 300 seconds in 1 second steps.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300 seconds in
1 second steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
3.5.1 Setting
Setting list for Control common (FunctionID:5A0001)
Default setting
Range
value
Units

1A 5A 1A 5A
CMNCTRL SDCEN Off/On - Setting of control to the same direction Off
CNTRV Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX]

0-1 - 0
level
TSC 30-300 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT Waiting execute operation time-out

30-300 s 30
timer
CNTVALMAX 9-2147483647 - Upper limit level of the counter 999999
- 182 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4 Technical Description
- 183 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.1 Outline of hardware modules

A hardware module consists of a case, input and output modules and a human machine
interface. Figure 4.1-1 shows the internal structure of the IED for an IED size of1/3×19” rack.
The IED hardware is arranged into the following modules:
* Human machine interface (HMI)
* Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)
* Signal processing and communication module (CPU)
* Binary IO module (BIO)
* Power supply module (PWS)
VCT CPU BIO PWS
Figure 4.1-1 Modules in 1/3 19” rack chassis (Front view, with HMI panel removed)
- 184 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The block diagram in IED is shown in Figure 4.1-2.
VCT CPU
Filter MPU LAN I/F LAN

A/D network
CT×n
AC analog
input
I
BI, BO, or BIO

Binary input
circuits Binary output
HMI
Binary output
LCD/MIMIC circuits Binary input
LEDs
Operation keys
Monitoring jacks
Function Key
Maintenance USB
PC I/F
Power supply
PWS
Figure 4.1-2 Hardware Block Diagram
- 185 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.2 IED case and module slot

4.2.1 1/1 Case
Figure 4.2-1 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 1/1 size: (a) IED internal structure
seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic
diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 4.2-1.a)

Thirteen slots are provided for mounting modules. The transformer module (VCT), the signal
processing and communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) are
mounted at predefined locations in the case. The binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are
placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#8), these slot locations are determined before factory shipment.
For detailed information on slot locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs,
see external connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external connection).
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 4.2-1.b)

The group of terminal blocks for the 1/1 case viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to BI,
BO, and BIO, the terminal blocks are designed with both upper and lower terminals and are
labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and so on. Note that both the upper and
lower terminals are provided in the form of a single terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or
BIOs. The terminal screw numbers for each terminal block relate to the individual circuits
and the user should check the configuration for each circuit. (For details, see section 4.5 or
later). Each slot is identified by its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on the IED case.
For example, the user can identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference
“T1”.
For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T9” for PWS. The PWS circuits and relevant terminals are
discussed later. (For details, see section 4.6 or later)
The communication modules, which are between the VCT slot and BIO slot, are labeled
“C11” to “C15”. These communication modules are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication,
and external devices.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 4.2-1.c)

The slots and terminal blocks in the IED are shown. Using this figure, the user can find the
location of VCT, BIO, and PWS. This figure is useful when the user sets binary IO modules
using the setting tables. (For setting of binary IO modules, see section 4.5)
- 186 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
a. View from front side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1 FG2
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 4.2-1 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/1 IED case
- 187 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.2.2 3/4 case

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T7” for PWS.
4.2.3 1/2 case

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T4” for PWS.
4.2.4 1/3 case

Figure 4.2-4 shows the case structure for 1/3 ×19” rack: (a) IED internal structure seen from
the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 4.2-4.a)

Four slots are provided: the transformer module (VCT), the signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) and binary IO modules
(BI, BO, and BIO) are placed into slots. The binary IO module is located in slot “IO#1”.
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 4.2-4.b)

With respect to the binary IO modules, the terminal block is designed with both upper and
lower terminals; they are labeled with the alpha-numeric reference “T1”. Users should note
that the upper terminal and the lower terminal are provided as a single terminal block. The
terminal screw numbers relate to the binary IO module circuits; thus the user should check
the configuration of each circuit.
Note that the PWS is labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 4.2-4.c)

The user can find the location of VCT, BIO, and PWS modules form the schematic diagram. It
is useful when the user wishes to set binary IO modules using their setting tables The user
can see the modules at the slot locations respectively from external connection figures (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).
- 188 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGD FGC FGB FGA
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
Figure 4.2-2 Slots and terminal blocks in 3/4 case
- 189 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1
2 2 2 C11
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10
11
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19 C13
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25 C14
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
E
39 39 39
40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 190 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

T2 T1
1
2
1
2
C11
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9 VC1
C12
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
C13
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25
26
25
26
C14
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32
33 33
34 34
C15 FG1
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
E
39 39
40 40
FG FGA
T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 191 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.3 Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

The transformer module (VCT) is used to acquire the power system quantities in the IED. A
safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT
module is removed from the IED case. Note also that all of the voltage inputs are disconnected.
However, the user should short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage
inputs.
Note: The user should set the ratio and rated current prior to the operation. For more
information, see below mentioned sections Set of VCT ratio and Set of rated
current.
- 192 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.3.1 VCT in Type 31B

The type 31B VCT is designed with inputs for voltage and current. Input terminals are
provided for these currents, as shown in Figure 4.3-1. The type 31B is available for 1/2 case
and larger.
As shown from Figure 4.3-1, three phase voltages, three phase currents, three
zero-sequence voltages, and a reference signal are fed to the internal circuits with the IED.
VCT Type 31B

AC analog
VL1 Terminal Type of input
Screw Input signal JP
VL2 input channel
Number
VL3
number
1 2 VL1 Voltage NA Ch1
V0
Vs
7 8 V0 Voltage NA Ch4
9 10 Vs Voltage NA Ch5
11 12 NA NA NA NA
Ia
Ib
13 14 NA NA NA NA
Ic
15 16 NA NA NA NA
Ie’ / 3I0 17 18 Ia Current W9 Ch9
Ie’ / 3I0
19 20 Ib Current W10 Ch10
21 22 Ic Current W11 Ch11
Ie for SEF
23 24 Ie’ / 3I0 Current W12 Ch12
27 28 Ie for SEF Current W14 Ch14
Figure 4.3-1 Transformer module (VCT type 31B)

Note: The user should connect a pair of Ie’ with a wire for the operation, as shown in
Figure 4.3-2
VCT Type 31B
23
Ie’
24
25
26 Ie’
27
28 Ie for SEF
Figure 4.3-2 I4 and I5 being in series connection
- 193 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

The type 32B VCT is designed with inputs for a single three-phase current and zero-sequence
currents. Note that the type 32B is used only in the 1/3 case; the size of the type 32B is
smaller than the regular type of VCTs Therefore, only 20 input terminals are provided for the
type 32B, as shown in Figure 4.3-3. The currents are fed to the internal circuits within the
IED.
VCT Type 32B

AC analog
Terminal Input Type of
Screw Jumper input channel
Number Signal input
number
1 2 NA NA NA –
3 4 NA NA NA –
5 6 NA NA NA –
Ia 7 8 Ia Current W5 Ch5
Ib 9 10 Ib Current W6 Ch6
Ic 11 12 Ic Current W7 Ch7
Ie’ / 3Ie0 13 14 Ie’ / 3I0 Current W8 Ch8
Ie’ / 3Ie0 15 16 Ie’ / 3I0 Current W13 Ch13
17 18 Ie for SEF Current W14 Ch14
Ie for SEF
19 20 NA NA NA –

Note: The user should connect “I4” with “I5” with a wire for the operation, as shown in
Figure 4.3-2
VCT Type 31B
13
14
Ie’ / 3I0
15
16 Ie’ / 3I0
17
18 Ie for SEF
Figure 4.3-4 Series connection for Ie’
Care should be taken that the current I5 is used for the function of sensitive earth fault
protection.
- 194 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

The type 33B VCT is designed with inputs for voltages. Note that the type 33B is used only in
the 1/3 case; the size of the type 33B is smaller than the regular type of VCTs Therefore, only
20 input terminals are provided for the type 33B, as shown in Figure 4.3-3. The currents are
fed to the internal circuits within the IED.
VCT Type 33B

AC analog
VL1
Number Signal input
number
VL2
VL3
Vs 7 8 Vs Voltage NA Ch5
9 10 V0 Voltage NA Ch6
V0
11 12 NA NA NA –
13 14 NA NA NA –
15 16 NA NA NA –
17 18 NA NA NA –
19 20 NA NA NA –
- 195 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

The type 34B VCT is designed with inputs for voltages and currents. Note that the type 34B is
used only in the 1/3 case; the size of the type 34B is smaller than the regular type of VCTs
Therefore, only 20 input terminals are provided for the type 34B, as shown in Figure 4.3-3.
The currents are fed to the internal circuits within the IED.
VCT Type 34B

AC analog
VL1
Number Signal input
number
VL2
VL3
Ia 7 8 NA NA NA NA
Ib 9 10 Ia Current W6 Ch6
Ic 11 12 Ib Current W7 Ch7
Ie’ / 3I0
13 14 Ic Current W8 Ch8
Ie’ / 3I0
19 20 NA NA NA NA

Note: The user should connect “I4” with “I5” with a wire for the operation, as shown in
Figure 4.3-2
VCT Type 31B
15
16
Ie’
17
18 Ie’
Figure 4.3-7 I4 and I5 being in series connection
- 196 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.3.5 Constitution of VCT

Figure 4.3-8 shows a VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram1; the same
terminal screw numbers are shown on the terminal block and schematic diagram. The user
should note that the last terminal screw2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-wire by
default.
1Note: When the size of the IED case is 1/1, two alpha-numeric references (VC1 and VC2)
and two slot references (VCT#1 and VCT#2) are available.
2Note: In standard VCTs, the last terminal screw is designated as “No. 30”.
- 197 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
VC1
VC1
VCT
Alpha-numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Short-wire1
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
Short-wire1
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 4.3-8 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: The connection between terminal screw 30 and FG is made with a short-wire by
the manufacturer.
2Note: This figure is used for general instruction with regard to the VCT. Thus, the
alpha-numeric reference for the VCT will depend on the IED model.
3Note: “VC2” is available for VCT#2 slot.
- 198 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.3.6 Setting VCT ratio

For the respective auxiliary VT/CTs used in the VCT, the user can set a VT/CT ratio via
operation of the IED screen†. The table below shows the setting range for each of the AC
analog input channels‡. For example, when the user wishes to set the ratio of AC analog input
channel#2 at the VCT#1 slot, the user should set the value of the VCT ratio using the setting
[AI1_Ch2_Ratio]. The range of the ratio is defined from 1.000 to 20000.000.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
VCT#1 AC1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
AC1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
VCT#2 AC2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on IED operation, see Chapter User interface: AC analog
input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
- 199 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.3.7 Selection of rated current

The rated current of the auxiliary CT in the VCT module is pre-configured when the IED is
shipped from the manufacturer; the value of the rated current is set uniquely either 1 ampere
or 5 ampere for all auxiliary CTs. However, the user can independently change the value of
the rated current from the pre-configured rated current. The sections that follow explain how
the value of rated current can be individually changed; it is important that the user shall
carry out and confirm that both jumper and screen operations have been made correctly.
(i) Jumper switching

Each of the auxiliary CTs has a Jumper, and the user can select between a rated current of 1
ampere (1A) and a rated current of 5 ampere (5A) using the Jumpers. The user can select the
rated current by following the steps below with reference to Figure 4.3-9:
Step1: Open the IED front panel.
Step2: Remove the receptacle from the header when the rating requirement is for 1A.
When a rating of 5A is required, insert the receptacle into the header.
The locations of the Jumpers are designated with the marks “W1” to “W14”, which are
printed on the circuit board of the VCT. These “W*” marks correspond to the AC analog input
channel numbers discussed previously.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
W1
W2
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Location of Jumpers
W4
Connector
Jumpers
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph
Setting for 5 A rating Setting for 1 A rating

receptacle
header header
Figure 4.3-9 Jumpers and their locations
- 200 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) IED screen operation

The user should keep in mind that the rated current will be changed† following jumper
switching. The table below shows the setting items for each AC analog input channel. For
example, when the user wishes to change the rated current on AC analog input channel#3 at
the VCT#1 slot, for example if the user wishes to change the rated current to 1 ampere from 5
ampere, the user should apply the setting [AI1_Ch2_Rating] 1A. Term “DEP” in the table
represents a pre-configured rated current set by the manufacturer; the pre-configured rated
current is identical to the AC rating determined in accordance with the order from the
customer. Thereby, the user should be careful not to change other setting items, which the
user does not wish to alter from the original requirements specified in the customer order.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
VCT#1 AC1_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 DEP
AC1_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 DEP
VCT#2 AC2_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 DEP
†Note: Number of auxiliary CTs depends on the configuration of the VCT type and the
VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the rating corresponding to a specific
auxiliary CT. For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
- 201 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.4 Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

A signal-processing and communication module (CPU) is made up of a main circuit board for
processing (CPU1) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). These circuit boards are used for LAN, time synchronization and others. These
circuit boards are mounted on CPU1 and are provided with connectors on their printed circuit
board (PCB). Figure 4.4-1 shows an example of full implementation of these PCBs.
CPU1
COM#1
COM#2
COM#3
COM#4
COM#5
Figure 4.4-1 Piggyback circuit boards (COM#1 to COM#5) on CPU1

Note: The implementation of the above may vary according to circumstances..
202
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.4.1 Communication modules

For communication, piggyback-circuit-modules are provided and these are mounted on CPU1,
as shown in Table 4.4-1. These specifications are tabulated and their symbols are also shown
in Table 4.4-1. The arrangement of these modules depends on the IED models. Thus, it is
required to refer external connection figures in order to examine which modules are used and
where they are located. The external connection figures are shown separately. (See Appendix:
Typical External connection)
Table 4.4-1 Communication modules

I/F 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX
Connector SC type RJ45 type
Medium Fiber optic Twist pair
Usage Substation Substation
automation automation
system and system and others
others
Symbol 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX
TX
RX
I/F RS485 IRIG-B000 GIO

Connector PCB connector PCB connector D-sub 9 type
Medium Twist pair Twist pair Twist pair
Usage Setting and Time Connection for
monitoring for synchronization external I/O unit
the IED
Symbol A1
RS485 IRIG-B000
A1
GIO
B1 B1 SIG
COM-A
A2 A2(Disuse)
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM GND
1. 100BASE-TX module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The 100BASE-TX module is used for
the GR-TIEMS operation or the communication for remote end. Use a shielded twisted pair
cable so that electric magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
2. 100BASE-FX module (SC plug)
- 203 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100BASE-FX module is used for the
communication for remote end.
3. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector; this module is connected with twisted pair cables. It is
used for communication of IEC60870-5-103, Modbus, and DNP. The terminal arrangement
and references are shown below.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2
B2 COM-B(−)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 COMM(GND)
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
Figure 4.4-2 RS485 connector and circuit
4. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used for the calendar clock. The data being in conformity to serial
IRIG-B000 format is sent from an external clock. This module is isolated using a photo coupler.
The user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
5. GIO module
GIO module is used to link an IED with an external I/O unit. GIO module is made with a
D-sub9 socket. It is connected using twisted pair cables. Figure 4.4-3 shows the cable
specification of GIO.
- 204 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Dsub–9P (Plug) Dsub–9P (Plug)

(male) (male)
Twist pair cable
CN1 CN2
M2.6 screw M2.6 screw
CN1 Twist pair cable CN2

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10
Figure 4.4-3 GIO cable and its structure
4.4.2 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
For example, Figure 4.4-4 shows LAN modules (100BASE-FX) placed at locations C11 and
C12. Blank panels are placed at the other locations. The user can find the corresponded
communication modules placed into the IED on the right side.
- 205 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE-FX
C11 100BASE-FX
C12
Blank panel
C12 100BASE-FX
Blank panel C13

C13 (BLANK)
C14
C14 (BLANK)
Blank panel
FG1
E C15
C15 (BLANK)
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 4.4-4 Communication modules structure (an example)
206
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5 Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 4.5-1.
Table 4.5-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
9 BIO4A Variable 6 0 0 6 1 1
1Note: One of two voltages is applied for the binary IO modules: 48Vdc (24 to 60) and
220Vdc (110 to 250). The DC voltage supplied to the IED determines the
voltage type selection; hence, a combination of different voltage types is not
possible.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 4.5.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 4.5-5.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either a
high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the ones of the
variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard to input voltage
using settings.
- 207 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.1 Binary input feature

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 4.5-2.
Table 4.5-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
-Sharing common BI1 BI1

Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
Terminal screw
number
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A
Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
7 BIO4A Same as BI2A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 4.5.5.
- 208 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable
logic for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 4.5-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table
4.5-4 shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 4.5-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 4.5-3. Also, see section 4.5.6 (i).
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can configure 18 CPLs in BI1A.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.
- 209 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 4.5-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A and BIO4A)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
THRES_Grp1 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI1, BI2, and BI3 75

THRES_Grp2 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI4, BI5, and BI6 75
Common THRES_Grp3 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI7 to BI94 75
THRES_Grp4 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI10 to BIn4 75
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in
BI1_CPL Off
BI1
BI2_CPL Off
BI 2
BI3_CPL Off
BI 3
….. ….. ….. ….. …..

BIn_CPL Off
BI n
BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can set for 12 CPLs in BI2A and for 6 CPLs in BIO4A.
As an example, Figure 4.5-1 shows the binary input circuit of BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has three
settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
- 210 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
BI1-NC Filter BI1
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
BI2-NC BI2
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
High [THRES_Lvl]
R
Figure 4.5-1 Common programmable logic for BI1A
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to
see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
- 211 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the function
ID “200B001” and Data ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when the signal
“BI2-CPL” on BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should designate that
signal using the function ID “200B002” and Data ID “8001001172”. For more
information with regard to the function ID and the Data ID at IO#1, see sections
4.5.6(i), 4.5.7(i), and others.
- 212 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i) Setting threshold level

(i)-1 For Standard type (BI1A and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
(i)-2 For Variable type (exclusive for BI2A and BIO4A)

BI2A and BIO4A have a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the threshold level of the input voltage as required. This unique feature is
performed with settings [THRES_Grp1], [THRES_Grp2], [THRES_Grp3], and [THRES_Grp4];
every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Provided that the user uses BI2A, then binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting
[THRES_Grp1] and the user should set the value between 10 to 220V DC1 for this setting. For
the setting [THRES_Grp2] , the above mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input
circuits; similarly the setting [THRES_Grp3] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and
finally the setting [THRES_Grp4] is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
On the other hand, when BIO4A is used, the binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the
setting [THRES_Grp1]; and the binary input circuits #4 to #6 follow the setting
[THRES_Grp2]. Since BIO4A has six binary input circuits, the other settings [THRES_Grp3]
and [THRES_Grp4] are not required here.
2Note: The value of the threshold is fixed for all binary IO module types with the
exception of BI2A and BIO4A where the user can set the threshold arbitrarily
between 10 to 220V DC and can regulate its threshold voltage in voltage steps. The
user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type” influences these values
(see the 1st note in Table 4.5-1). These particular values are found when 220V dc
type are used.
- 213 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 4.5-2 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of
contact chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the
calculation of ‘t’ is,
1
[𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶_𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁] ×
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 12
The setting [CMP_NUM] and the scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is provided for all binary input
circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 4.5-2 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust
the timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On
Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
- 214 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 4.5-3 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on BI1A at IO#1 and
BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to BI1A and BIO1A using the
setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for BI1A and BIO1A at
IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type (in section
4.5.6(i)-1 and 4.5.6(ii)-1).
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
IO#1
IO#2
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for c. Setting targets for
BI1A (IO#1) BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.5-3 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
- 215 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
This setting table (in section 4.5.6(i)-1) is available for all binary IO modules except for
BI2A and BIO4A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are
relevant to BI1A. That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for BIO1A
the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #7) from
IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown
section 4.5.6(ii)-1. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)
- 216 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.3 Binary output feature

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types of
BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 4.5-1 and Table 4.5-5. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 4.5.5.
- 217 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 4.5-5 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A
-OP Time: 2ms N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.13A
-OP Time: 4ms
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+) BIO4A
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Uses a Thyristor and a BO number
mechanical contact.
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O contact
-Break: 10A
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.13A BO number BIO3A
-OP Time: 9ms
N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections BIO4A
37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.13A N/O
-OP Time: 9ms 38
N/C
Contact
- 218 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL signal or a PLC signal can be used to initiate a binary output circuit. Table 4.5-6
shows the settings summary of CPL function.
Table 4.5-6 Setting items in binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs are
listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are summarized
- 219 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
in each slot. (See sections 4.5.8(i) and 4.5.8(ii))
As an example, Figure 4.5-4 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help
understand the settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has five
CPLs. The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
&
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO2
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BO2 RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO3
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BO3 RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 DRIVER BOn
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BOn RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 4.5-4 Binary Output Circuit for BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 4.5-4 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
- 220 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 4.5.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 4.5.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the
eight input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should
set either AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
- 221 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a
scheme switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of
four types and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2)
delay type, (3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
(vi)-1 Instant type

If the user requires a binary output signal without the above characteristics (vi)-2, (vi)-1, and
(vi)-3, the user should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
(vi)-1 Delay type

If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
(vi)-2 Dwell type

For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
(vi)-3 Latch type

If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting
[Reset signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should
determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal
monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
- 222 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
IO#1
IO#2
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10
b. Setting targets for c. Setting targets for

BO1A (IO#2) BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.5-5 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 4.5-5 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output
circuits, the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user
should key the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should
- 223 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
understand and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for BO1A
the user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18)
from IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary
output circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section
4.5.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 4.5-4, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See
section 4.5.9(i)-3 and 4.5.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC
function)
- 224 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.5 Structure of binary IO Module

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types and the arrangement of the respective
inputs-and-outputs are particular to each binary IO module type, as shown in Figure 4.5-6 to
Figure 4.5-9. Referring to the figures on the left, the user can for example, identify the actual
terminal blocks of the binary IO module. Corresponding circuits are drawn on the right in the
form of schematic diagrams. If the wiring of BI1A is considered, the wiring objects are
designated with terminal screw numbers 1 to 40. The terminal screw numbers are shown next
to the terminal blocks. Here the user can find a slot number labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”. The asterisk sign (*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the
actual implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of
binary IO modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection)
Note that some input and output circuits have polarity, which is designated with either a
plus sign (+) or a minus sign (−) respectively.
- 225 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T* T* T*
Screw
BI1A BI2A BI3A
T*
(+) 1 (+) 1 (+) 1
1 BI1 BI1 BI1
(−) 2 (−) 2 (+) 2
2 BI2
(+) 3 (+) 3
3 BI2 BI3
(−) 4 (+) 4
4 BI4
5 (+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI2 6 BI5
6 (−) (−) (+) BI6
7 (+) 7 (+) 7 (+) 7
8 BI4 8 BI3 8 BI7
8 (−) (−) (+)
9 9 BI8
9 (+) (+)
10 BI5 10 BI9
10 (−) (+)
11 11 11 BI10
11 (+) (+) (+)
12 BI6 12 BI4 12 BI11
12 (−) (−) (+)
13 13 13 BI12
13 (+) (+) (+)
14 BI7 14 BI5 14 BI13
14 (−) (−) (+)
15 15 BI14
15 (+) (+)
16 BI8 16 BI15
16 (−) (+)
17 17 17 BI16
17 (+) (+) (+)
18 BI9 18 BI6 18 BI17
18 (−) (−) (+) BI18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 (+) 21 (+) 21 (+) 21
22 BI10 BI7 BI19
22 (−) (−) 22 (+) 22
BI20
23 (+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
24 (−) (+)
25 25 25 BI22
25 (+) (+) (+)
26 BI12 26 BI8 26 BI23
26 (−) (−) (+)
27 27 27 BI24
27 (+) (+) (+)
28 BI13 28 BI9 28 BI25
28 (−) (−) (+)
29 29 BI26
29 (+) (+)
30 BI14 30 BI27
30 (−) (+)
31 B31 31 BI28
31 (+) (+) (+)
32 BI15 B32 BI10 32 BI29
32 (−) (−) (+)
33 B33 33 BI30
33 (+) (+) (+)
34 34 BI16 B34 BI11 34 BI31
(−) (−) (+) BI32
35 (+) 35 (−) 35
36 (−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
37 (+) 37 (+) B37 (−) 37
38 BI18 BI12
38 (−) (−) B38 (−) 38
39
40
Terminal blocks Schematic figures
Figure 4.5-6 Input arrangements for BI1A, BI2A, and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 4.5-2 or Table 4.5-5.
- 226 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Alpha-numeric reference for BO. Sign “*” is substituted for

the slot location number.
T* T*
BO1A BO2A
T*
1 1 1
(+)
2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3 3
(+)
4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5 5
(+)
6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7 7
(+)
8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9 9
(+)
10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11 11
(+)
12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13 13
(+)
14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15 15
(+)
16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17 17
(+)
18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
19
20 The same terminal
screw is denoted
with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
22 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
24 BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
26 BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
28 BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 31 (+)
32 BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 33 (+)
34 BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35 35
36 BO17 36
37 37
38 BO18 38
39
40
Figure 4.5-7 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

- 227 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Alpha-numeric reference of BIO. Sign “*” is

substituted for the actual slot location number.
T* T*
BIO1A BIO2A
T* (+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 2 BI1
1 (−) (−)
2 (+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI2
3 (−) (−)
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI3
5 (−) (−)
6 (+) 7 (+) 7
8 BI4 8 BI4
7 (−) (−)
8 (+) 9 (+) 9
9 10 BI5 10 BI5
(−) (−)
10 (+) 11 (+) 11
11 12 BI6 12 BI6
(−) (−)
12 (+) 13 (+) 13
13 14 BI7 14 BI7
(−) (−)
14 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) BI8
15 16 16
(−)
16 17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
17 18 18
(−)
18
19
20
The same terminal

21 21 21
screw is denoted with BO3(SF) (+)
22 22 22 BI10
the same number. (−)
23 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11
24 (−)
25 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12
26 (−)
27 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28
28
29 29 29
30 BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30
31 31 31
32 BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32
33 33 33
34 BO9 34 BO4 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO10 36 BO5 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.5-8 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A and BIO2A

- 228 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*” is substituted

for the actual slot location number.
T* T*
BIO3A BIO4A
T* 1 1
1 (+) (+)
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (−)
(+) 3 (+) 3
3 BI2 BI2
(−) 4 (−) 4
4
(+) 5 (+) 5
5 BI3 BI3
(−) 6 (−) 6
6
(+) 7 (+) 7
7 BI4 BI4
(−) 8 (−) 8
8
(+) 9 (+) 9
9 BI5 BI5
(−) 10 (−) 10
10
(+) 11 (+) 11
11 BI6 BI6
12 (−) 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−)
17 (+)
17 BO1(H) 18 (−)
18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
BO1(F) 22 BO2(H) 22
22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
BO2(F) 24 BO3(H) 24 (−)
24
25 25 25 (+)
BO3(F) 26 BO4(H) 26
26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
BO4(F) 28 BO5(H) 28
28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO5(F) 30 BO6(H) 30 (−)
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
34 BO7 34 BO7 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO8 36 BO8 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.5-9 Input and output arrangements in BIO3A and BIO4A
Note: PHOENIX CONTACT ® is the manufacturer of the terminal block. The model of
this terminal is described as “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can
connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the
recommended cables are AWG12–AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm.
Use “AI2.5-10BU” for AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” for AWG16
(cross section 1.25mm2) in the PHOENIX CONTACT ® when a cable ferrule is
required.
- 229 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 For the standard type being furnished
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

(i)-2 For the variable type being furnished

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low
Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……

- 230 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
(ii)-1 For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
(ii)-2 For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)
- 231 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI11 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI12 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI13 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI14 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI15 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI16 signal without filter
(i)-2 After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
- 232 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i)-3 The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
(ii)-1 Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
(ii)-2 After the filter

(ii)-3 The ends of binary input circuits

- 233 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Range
value
Units
1A 5A 1A 5A
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.000
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
- 234 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))
- 235 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.5.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
(i)-2 After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal
- 236 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i)-3 Connection points for the PLC

 Connection point in PLC logic
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
(ii)-1 Before the contact-driver
(ii)-2 After the contact-driver

(ii)-3 Connection points for the PLC

- 237 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.6 Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The
input range rating of the PWS is 110 to 250 V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
*
T
1
PWS
2
3
4
5
6
7 2
8
9 4
10 FAIL1
11 3
12 Terminal screw
13 number 1
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL2 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
Terminal screw
23
number
24
25 29
Positive(+)
26
30
DC
27
28 /
29 Negative(−) 31 DC
30 32
31
35
Short wire‡ Short wire†
32
Short wire†
33
34 36
35 E
37
36
37
38
38
39
Short-wire‡
40
FG
FG
Frame earth Screw M5 screw for case earthing§
Terminal and Earthing screws Schematic diagram
Figure 4.6-1 PWS terminal block (Rear view)

CAUTION
†Note:The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. The user
should remove this short-wire when undertaking a withstand voltage test for the
IED. Remember that the user should reconnect the terminals with this short-wire
238
6F2S1891 (0.2)
after the test.

‡Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG” is
made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
§Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its
cross-section is AWG14 or larger.
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 4.6-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided for monitoring
PWS module failure. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are linked to the power supply.
Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for the power terminal and are
used when bus distribution is required or when the safety improvement of the cable capacity
is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw No. 38 and FG, by default, are
linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw No. 37. The user
should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw. The other terminal screws are
not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
Table 4.6-1 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating permissible
Input voltage (110/125V, 220/250V) is available
DC: 110 to 250V DC: 88 to 300V where the voltage varies in ±20% of the rated
voltage (110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
Note: The terminal block is made by PHOENIX CONTACT®. This model is designated
“FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can connect a cable to this terminal
directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are AWG12 to
AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI2.5-10BU” ferrule for
AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” ferrule for AWG16 (cross section
1.25mm2) when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.
239
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.7 Human Machine Interface (HMI)

4.7.1 HMI Outlook
Figure 4.7-1 is the GR series IED human machine interface module (HMI) outlook on the
front panel. The HMI has a LCD screen (standard, large or MIMIC), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (A/B/C) and a USB port. The LCD
displays information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, monitoring, fault records
and etc. The LED indicators #1 and #2 indicate the IED status (see the Table 4.7-1 in detail).
Other LED indicators from #3 to #26 would indicate the user configurable status that
controlled by the PLC function (please refer the PLC manual for detail). The indicator label at
the right of the LED indicator is for showing corresponding indicator’s purpose.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) LCD
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(A/B/C) USB port
Figure 4.7-1 HMI on front panel
Table 4.7-1 LED indicators factory default setting

LED Factory Default
LED Color Remarks
Indicator # Label
#1 IN SERVICE Green Lit in green when the IED is in service.
#2 ERROR Red Lit in red when the IED is in error status.
The user configurable indicators. The input
Red/ Green/
#3 – #26 (Blank) signals will be controlled by the PLC
Yellow functions.
The monitoring jacks are used in the test mode. The LED indicators: A, B and C, will show the
status of these jacks. These monitoring signals will be able to monitor on the oscilloscope. The
USB port is a USB B-type connector and it is used for connecting the PC.
- 240 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
4.7.2 LED indicators (#3–#26)

The LED indicators from #3 to #26 are the user configurable indicators. Each indicators would
be able to controlled by the various settings of the PLC besides its signal for the LED; i.e. 8
input signals which the user set for each LED control independently, the logic gate
(AND/OR/NOR) of these input signals, the delay time for both on/off, the logic level inversion
and the logic timer switch. Please see the following schematic diagrams (Figure 4.7-2)
[INVERSE-SW] 3100031001 LED3
t 0 0 t Normal LED-03
Input signal 1 DRIVER
& AND ≥1 & Logic Timer ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse
1 0 t
Input signal 3
&
≧1 OR
Off &
=1 XOR 0.000-300.000s
Delay
Input signal 8
Blink
Dwell &
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
[INVERSE-SW] 3100041001 LED4

t 0 0 t Normal LED-03
1 0 t
Input signal 3
&
≧1 OR
Off &
=1 XOR 0.000-300.000s
Delay
Input signal 8 Blink
Dwell &
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
[INVERSE-SW] 3100__1001 LEDn

t 0 0 t Normal LED-n
1 0 t
Input signal 3
&
≧1 OR
Off &
=1 XOR 0.000-300.000s
Delay
Input signal 8
Blink
Dwell &
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
Figure 4.7-2 LED logics
- 241 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Settings for LED indicators (Function ID: 201B01)
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
……….

- 242 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Data ID
Signal monitoring point Function ID: 201B01
Signal Name Element ID Description
LED-03 3100031001 LED-03(Programmable)
LED-10 31000A1001 LED-10(Programmable)
LED-11 31000B1001 LED-11(Programmable)
LED-12 31000C1001 LED-12(Programmable)
LED-13 31000D1001 LED-13(Programmable)
LED-14 31000E1001 LED-14(Programmable)
LED-15 31000F1001 LED-15(Programmable)
- 243 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
5 Engineering tool
- 244 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
5.1 Overview of GR-TIEMS

When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). GR-TIEMS should be installed into
a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states on a PC screen
connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using GR-TIEMS.
Figure 5.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and event
records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is connected
with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in GR-TIEMS operations, see a
separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
- 245 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
6 PLC function
- 246 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
6.1 Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) function is for configuring the I/Os, alarms, indications,
recording and others. PLC logics consists of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and logics “AND, OR, XOR,
NOT”; and user can configure PLC-logics by PLC tool (MULTIPROG ®). The PLC tool should
be installed in user’s PC before using the PLC tool. Figure 6.1-1 show the screen of the PLC
tool.
Figure 6.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®
Note: For more information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic
manual: Programmable Logic Controller and PLC tool (6F2S1904)).
- 247 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
7 Recording Function
- 248 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The IED provides the following recording functions:

Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
In addition to being able to display these records on the IED screen they can also be
displayed on a local or remote PC. In a later chapter, the procedure used to view record data is
discussed. (See chapter User interface.)
7.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is initiated by tripping commands generated by the IED. Fault recording can
also be started by a tripping command from an external main protection or PLC command by
user setting. Fault recording captures the following items for each fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence
Faulted phase
Operating mode
Fault location
Power system quantities
Up to eight most recent, faults are stored as fault records. After eight faults have been stored,
the oldest fault record is deleted and the latest fault record is then stored
Fault recording provides the following items for each fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock.
Faulted phase
The faulted phase is displayed when tripping by a distance-measuring relay; the faulted
phase is recorded.
Operating mode
Operating mode shows the element names of the protection function, which outputs the
tripping commands. The user can select the protection function by user setting.
Fault location
Fault locator (FL) calculates a distance to the fault occurrence from IED. A calculation result
is recorded in km when the user has selected to record it in km. Of course, the user can select
to record it in mile using setting. The result is also recorded in a percentage (%) of the line
- 249 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
length.
Note: FL and its recording are available in certain models: 15, 16, 17, and 18 at “G&T”
position. To kwon the implementation of FL, see Appendix Ordering: Function
block.
Power system quantities

The following power system pre-fault quantities and fault quantities are record:
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase-to-phase currents (Iab, Ibc, Ica)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component currents (I1, I2, I0)
Recording pre-fault quantities in power system are performed at pre-defined time before
tripping (resetting); the user can set the pre-defined time. “10 seconds” is set as a default
value.
7.2 Event Recording

The “Event Record” menu has three parts: “Event Record1”, “Event Record2” and “Event
Record3”. In each “Event Record” menu, any event that occurs in the IED (such as controlling,
alarm, etc.) is recorded.
With the IED screen, the user can assign Data IDs to the event triggers and set the
status of the trigger response. It is possible to separate all events into the three menus by
using GR-TIEMS1. It is also possible to set the name of the event and other information.
1Note: For further information on GR-TIEMS, see the separate instruction manual
"GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)".
Each “Event Record” menu displays the date and time of the event occurrence. The
details of the operation are also displayed. In each “Event Record” menu, up to 256 items can
be set and up to 1024 records can be stored. If more than 1024 event records occur, the oldest
event record is deleted and the latest event record is stored. All the events are recorded in
milliseconds. A data ID can be assigned to an event trigger. The event trigger is responds to
the change in status of the data ID, such as on/off, open/close,
travelling0/travelling1/travelling2, etc.
The user can clear “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”, and “Event Record3”. Note that
the user should clear these records individually when they wish to clear2. That is, it is not
possible to remove all three-event records at once. (See chapter User interface: Display of
- 250 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Event Records.)
2Note: When the user selects bulk clearing, it removes all records (including fault records
and disturbance records) at once.
7.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording can commence when either of the following three states occurs: (1) the
issue of a trip command, (2) the operation of OC relay or UV relay, or (3) triggers fed by user
settings(up to four triggers are available).
The disturbance recording can acquire both analog items and binary items. These items
are stored into the IED based on sampling resolution. (The number of sampling per cycle is
either 24 or 48; the user can set this number.)
The number of binary items can be up to 256. The user can set the number as required.
The user can assign any binary item to disturbance recording. The binary item relates to a
Data ID. The Data ID can be set from the IED screen or by using GR-TIEMS. The user can
also change the name of the binary item using GR-TIEMS.
The IED screen can display the analog items. It is possible to configure the IED screen
so that it does not display the analog items.
The IED screen shows the number of disturbance records, whereas the user can see the
detail of the disturbance records using GR-TIEMS. The information displayed includes the
following data: the records that have occurred, maximum number of stored records, date and
time when the disturbance recording occurs. The data is stored is COMTRADE format.
The recording time can be set from 0.1s to 10.0s and the default setting time is 3.0s. The
pre-fault recording time can be set from 0.1s to 10.0s and the default setting time is 0.3s. The
pre-fault recording time is included in the recording time and the user can obtain the pre-fault
records as required.
The number of analog items, binary items, and the recording time limits the number of
disturbance record. The user can set this number. The default number of disturbance records
differs depending upon power system frequency, as shown in Table 7.3-1.
- 251 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 7.3-1 Number of binary items and recording time

Number of Stored Records
Number of Number of Recording
Binary Items Time 50Hz 60Hz
Analog Items
7.5° 15° 7.5° 15°
1s 255 255 220 255
10 (≤)256 3s 91 178 76 149
5s 55 108 46 91
Note: If the number of analog items and recording time setting are changed, the records
stored so far are deleted.
- 252 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
8 Metering Function
- 253 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The metering function is to examine present values and demand values such as, voltages,
current, power factor, and others. These data measured are displayed on the IED screen or a
PC screen at remote site.
8.1 Display of current metering

The AC analogue input data is continuously monitored in the IED. The following data is
displayed on the IED screen. The user can monitor the data using a maintenance PC. The
data is updated every second.
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic)1
- Magnitude and phase angle of the zero-sequence current from residual circuit (Ie)1
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component currents (I1, I2, I0)1
1Note: The user can select to display values based on either the primary side or the
secondary side of the VCT. Screen menu “Setting–>Metering–>Display value” is
provided to select primary or secondary values. For the procedure used for
selection, see Chapter User interface: Setting submenu.
2Note: A displayed value is based on the primary side only.
8.2 Demand value for metering

- Maximum of the phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic: max.)
- Maximum of the zero-sequence current from the circuit (Ie: max)
The necessity current and voltage for input are greater than 0.01×”In” (“In” is the value to the
rated current of the VCT) and 0.06×”V” as to the measurement (“V” is the value based on the
secondary side of the VCT).
The user can select to display values based on either the primary side or the secondary side.
Values “max”, “min”, and “avg” in the demand represent maximum, minimum and average
values as to demand-time-setting (1 to 60 minutes). The demand value updated cycle is set
using the demand-time-setting. To display the values accurately, the user should set the value
of CT ratio as correctly. The setting method is discussed in chapter User interface.
- 254 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
9 Automatic supervision
- 255 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
9.1 Basic concept of supervision

Since the protection system is in the non-operating state under normal conditions, it is
waiting for a power system failure to occur at any time and must operate for faults without
fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection
system during normal operation, plays an important role. The IED implements an automatic
supervision function taking advantage of this feature based on the following concepts:
 The supervising function should not affect protection performance.
 Perform supervision without fail whenever possible.
 When a failure occurs, it should be able to easily identify the location of the
failure.
9.2 Relay Monitoring

(i) CT circuit current monitoring
CT circuit current monitoring provides high-sensitivity detection of failures that arise in the
AC input circuit. Monitoring CT circuit current is used to check the state of the CT circuit. If
Equation (9.2-1) is true, it is determined that the CT circuit is in failure.
Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (9.2-1)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0: 20% of rated current
(ii) A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and the system checks that the data after A/D conversion is within the prescribed
range and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
(iii) Memory monitoring

This function is used to monitor the reliability of memory circuits and the way in which it is
performed depends upon the type of memory:
• Monitoring random access memory:
Checking the writing and reading function with prescribed data and checking the
storage function
• Monitoring program for memory monitoring:
Checking the checksum value of data written
• Monitoring setting values:
Checking discrepancies between the setting values stored in duplicate.
- 256 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv) DC Supply monitoring

The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and the system
checks that the DC voltage is within the prescribed range.
9.3 Circuit breaker contact monitoring

Circuit breaker auxiliary switch contact monitoring is achieved using N/O and N/C circuit
breaker auxiliary switch contact-signals. For more information, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common.
9.4 Disconnector contact monitoring

Disconnector auxiliary switch contact monitoring is achieved using N/O and N/C disconnector
auxiliary switch contact-signals. For more information, see Chapter Relay application:
Protection common.
9.5 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring

If there is a failure in either the PLC data and/or the IEC61850 mapping data, the function
may fail. Therefore, the PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data is monitored and an alarm to
indicate "PLC data stop" or "Data (cmmslv) stop" is generated when a failure is detected.
9.6 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring

The sending and receiving functions in the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The
receiving function can be checked by GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending
function can be checked by Ping response from other devices. If a failure is detected, an alarm
of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is generated.
These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GOOSE_recv] and
[Ping1:Sw].
Additionally, IEC61850 server/client communication status, such as connected client IP

address and number of sending/receiving packets can be monitored on screen.
- 257 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
9.7 Failure alarms

Display of alarms on the screen, indication by LEDs, recording of external-alarms and events
are performed when a failure is detected by the automatic supervision. Table 9.7-1
summarizes the supervision items and alarms. The alarms are retained until the failure is
recovered.
Table 9.7-1 Supervision Items and Alarms
LED LED
Supervision item Supervision level* Screen message "ERROR"
"IN SERVICE"
CT circuit monitoring Minor Error CT error On On
A/D accuracy check Serious Error AI#n(ACC) error Off On
CPU, Memory On
Serious Error CPUM error Off
monitoring
DC supply monitoring Minor Error Power error On On
Binary input and output On
Serious Error BIO#n error Off
monitoring
Disconnector On
Minor Error DS fail On
monitoring
PLC data Minor Error PLC data error On On
Remote communication
mapping data Minor Error Data(cmmslv) error On On
monitoring
GOOSE message On
Minor Error LAN(GOOSE) error On
check
Ping response check Minor Error LAN(ping) error On On
CB monitoring Minor Error CB#n error Off On
*Note: Supervision level is settable for each item.
9.8 Trip blocking

When the following supervision items detect a failure, the trip function is blocked for the
duration that the failure exists and is restored when the failure is recovered:
• A/D accuracy checking

• Memory monitoring
• DC supply monitoring
The trip function is valid when a failure is detected by trip output monitoring or disconnector
monitoring.
When a failure is detected by the CT circuit current monitoring function, the scheme
switch [CHK_CT:Lvl] can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is
output, or, if only an alarm is output. The CT circuit current monitoring can be disabled by
scheme switch [CHK_CT].
- 258 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
9.9 Trip circuit supervision (TCS)

The TCS function can issue an alarm when the TCS function detects failure in the current
supply for the trip circuit or the trip mechanism.
(i) TCS logics

The TCS has six monitor logics (TCS1 to TCS6), as shown in Figure 9.9-1. For example, the
TCS1 logic issues a signal “TC1_Fail” when the following conditions are decided in the TCS1
logic:
 Both signals at PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”
being absent for more than 0.4 sec.
 Either On or OPT-On† being set for scheme switch [TCS1-EN].
8000011BB0
800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1 &

8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN On
8100021B60
TCS2 scheme logic (same as TCS1 scheme logic) TC2_FAIL
8200031B60
8300041B60
8400051B60
8500061B60
≥1
8F00001B60
TC_FAIL
Figure 9.9-1 Six TCS scheme logics

†Note:If the user wishes to add a user-programmed condition for the TCS1 decision, set
OPT-On and connect the user-programmed signal at PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_COND”. The TCS1 monitor is only available when the
user-programmed signal is picked up at PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_COND”.
(ii) TCS application

(ii)-1 Application example1
Figure 9.9-2 shows an application example in the TCS function. Two binary-input signals are
assigned to PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”. When
- 259 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
the trip operation is completed, small current flows into two BI circuits, the CB auxiliary
contacts, and the trip coil. Flowing small current can be observed in CB-open condition and
CB-closed condition. If the small current is not supplied for the trip circuit, or if the
connections between the trip circuit and the BI circuits are lost (i.e., open circuits), a signal
"TC1_FAIL" is generated; then, the TCS1 logic issues a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.
Note: A threshold voltage is required to set in the BI circuit. The user should set a half of
trip supply voltage for the threshold. This is because two BI circuits are in series.
For example, the BI threshold voltage should be set below 55V when the 110V
voltage is applied. For TCS function, the user should select two BI circuits from the
BI2A module or BIO4 module, because the BI circuits of the both modules can have
low threshold voltages rather than the ones of the other modules.
Trip circuit
(+)
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1
circuit &
8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t
R TC1_FAIL
BI2 Binary input 800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s

circuit
8000011BB2
52a 52b
OPT−On &
≥1
TCS1−EN On
Trip coil
(−)
LCP & GIS
Figure 9.9-2 Connection example1 for TCS1 logic
(ii)-2 Application example 2

A binary input signal is assigned to PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_SINGAL1” in the
example 2. If a CB opens, small current could not flow into BI circuits. Therefore, it is
recommended that setting OPT-On for the scheme switch [TCS1-EN] and assigning
CB-closed-status signal to PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_COND”. Monitoring is only
enabled while CB is closed using this setting. This setting can avoid unnecessary monitoring.
- 260 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Trip circuit
(+)
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1
circuit &
8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t
TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
8000011BB2
52a
OPT−On &
≥1
CB closed TCS1−EN On
status signal
Trip coil
(−)
LCP & GIS
Figure 9.9-3 Connection example2 for TCS1 logic
(iii) Setting
Setting of TCS(Function ID: 482001)
Setting item 1A 5A Units Contents 1A 5A Notes
TCS1-EN Off / On / OPT-On — TCS1(Trip Circuit Supervision 1) enable Off
(iv) Data ID
TCS(Function ID: 482001)
8000011B60 TC1_FAIL Trip circuit1 fail
8F00001B60 TC_FAIL Trip circuit fail
8000011BB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit1 fail signal1

8000011BB2 TC1_FAIL_COND TC1 fail condition

- 261 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

TCS(Function ID: 482001)




- 262 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10 Communication protocol
- 263 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10.1 LAN communication

When LAN module(s) are furnished in the IED, the IED can have LAN communication using
“Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP)”. Thus, the user should set IP
addresses and others corresponding TCP/IP. Two communication features are provided in
TCP/IP: Hot-standby communication and monitoring LAN. The two features are discussed
later.
(i) How to set local IP address

Table 10.1-1 shows the summary of setting items of the LAN module. The user itself can set
an IP, a subnet mask, and a gateway addresses in the IED†.
Table 10.1-1 TCP/IP setting of LAN module

Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 IP address 192.l68.1.11
SUBNETMASK1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When the user wishes to change the addresses, the user can change their addresses.
Figure 10.1-1 shows setting menu to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 10.1-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)
†Note:For more information of communication modules, see Chapter Technical

description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Although the IED can furnish one or two LAN modules, the user should assign a
single IP address for the IED. (Incidentally, subscript ‘1’ of “IPADDRESS1,
SUBNETMASK1, and GATEWAY1” has no point.)
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set address on the IED
screen.
- 264 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) How to set Hot-standby communication

Redundant communication (i.e. “Hot-standby”) is designed to obtain more security if the
failure of communication occurs on the LAN network. The “Hot-standby” function is carried
out using two LAN modules in the IED.
On the Hot-standby communication, a first LAN module is used as the primary port (i.e.
LAN#1 port) while a second LAN module (i.e. LAN#2 port) is used as secondary port; the IED
can have communication with the LAN#1 port on the normal operation. If communication
failure occurs at the LAN#1 port, the IED can shift its communication from the LAN#1 to the
LAN#2 port automatically.
Upon the IED detects the occurrence of the communication failure where the LAN
module cannot response to the IED (i.e., the link-down in the communication), the IED starts
a timer. When the timer passes over setting [DownTime], the IED decides to change a port to
another port. Thus, the LAN#2 is used for the communication. (Note that the LAN#1 can be
discriminated as the secondary port on the occurrence of the failure. If the LAN#2 cannot
continue run, the LAN#1 will be re-switched to run after setting [UpTime]. Then, the LAN#2
will be discriminated as the secondary port.)
(ii)-1 Setting for redundant mode

The Hot-standby function runs when the user set Hot_Standby for scheme switch
[ReduandatMode]. If the user does not wish to run the Hot-standby function, set Fixed for the
scheme switch [ReduandatMode]. In this case, the LAN#2 does not function yet dual LAN
ports exist in the IED.
(ii)-2 Selection of any one of ports for the primary

The user can select any one of ports for the primary port although the LAN#1 port is used for
the primary normally. For example, provided that both the LAN#1 and the LAN#2 are
connected with the LAN physically, when the user wishes to use the LAN#2 as the primary
port, the user should set Port2 for scheme switch [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes not to
select the primary port, set None for scheme switch [PrimaryPort].
(ii)-3 Setting of link-down timer

As mention earlier, the occurrence of the communication failure is determined when the timer
passes over the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set the time for this decision for
the setting.
(ii)-4 Setting of link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the
- 265 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
communication on the LAN#1 is changed to the one on the LAN#2. If the failure of the one the
LAN#1 is removed after changing to the one on the LAN#2, the IED tries to re-start the one
on the LAN#1 as the primary port. In this case, for changing back to the original port and
re-starting the communication on the original port, the user can define a time for that. Set a
re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 10.1-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: LAN#2 being not used.
RedandantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby being activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences the 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: Being not selected for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: LAN#1 being selected for the priority.
Port2: LAN #2 being selected for the priority.
A timer starts upon the primary port is ready to start the
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
communication after switching port.
The user should notice the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of LAN#1 on the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of LAN#2 is not used even if the communication is carried out on
the LAN#2.
2 The user should connect an optical fiber properly when 100Base-FX module runs in
the IED, otherwise the repeat of communication failure (link-down) can be found
continuously. If the period of the link-down is shorter than the setting [DownTime],
another LAN port cannot be switched as the primary port. Thus, the user should
set the setting [DownTime] on the basis of the system requirement; the user can
set zero millisecond to introduce switching ports immediately. On the other hand,
the user can set any value less than 3000ms for the setting [DownTime] so that the
system may avoid the link-down for a long time. Note that switching between the
primary and secondary ports is not carried out where the user is setting the value
for the setting [DownTime]. The user should consider the setting [UpTime] as the
same manner of the setting [DownTime].
3 Auto-negotiation function is carried out when the communication network is
established in 100Base-TX modules. The auto-negotiation function selects a mode
for the communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the communication
speed. In the case of the link-down, the auto-negotiation will run again
immediately. The link-down condition continues until the auto-negotiation
completes (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user can set for the setting
[DownTime] any time less than the required time in the auto-negotiation function
- 266 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
in response to the system requirement (i.e., the user can set [DownTime] zero
msec.). In this case, switching between the primary and secondary ports will
perform immediately before the auto-negotiation function runs. If switching
between is not required before the completion of the auto-negotiation function, the
user can set the setting [DownTime] more than the required time in the
auto-negotiation function. The user can consider the setting [UpTime] as the same
manner of the setting [DownTime].
(ii)-5 Switching using PLC signals

Compulsory signals can switch the LAN ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is issued
via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, the communication is changed from the LAN#1 to
the LAN#2 port. On the other hand, changing from the LAN#2 to the LAN#1 port can be
executed on the signal reception via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
- 267 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) How to monitor network on Hot-standby operation

The Hot-standby function can send PING packets to remote devices so that the Hot-standby
function can monitor the state of the network. The Hot-standby function checks a response
signal from the remote device. If the Hot-standby function cannot have the response signal,
the Hot-standby function switches the other LAN port. The operation is performed when the
user set the scheme switches [RedandantMode] Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] On.
For monitoring remote devices on the network, settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are
provided in the Hot-standby function. When the user set plural remote IP addresses for the
settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function cannot receive any one of responses from
these remote devices, the Hot-standby function makes a decision of the occurrences of the
communication failures. Table 10.1-3 shows the settings in the network monitoring on the
Hot-standby operation.
Table 10.1-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby
Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1
terminals.
to 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when the
Ping_IP12
remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response. If any one of
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) responses cannot be received after the elapse of 1
setting time, the function will decide no-response.
Interval of PING sending. A PING packet is send
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packet for checking. The
“no-response “is introduced when the IED cannot
Chk_Count 1–10 get the responses form the same IP address. The 3
user can set the number of the response for the
“no-response “ using the setting [Chk_Count].
The user should note that burden could be brought into the network. This is because a
number of PING packets are sent to the network repeatedly. Thus, the user should choose
carefully setting values in accordance with the network capacity, the burden, and the required
time. Examples 1 and 2 below show that the results in the network monitoring in respective
settings.
- 268 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii)-1 Example operation 1

There is a remote device with Ping_IP1 address on the network. The Hot-standby function
sends ping packets to the remote device every five second; then the Hot-standby function
waits in one second until the Hot-standby function can have the response signal from the
remote device. The Hot-standby function can determine the communication failure if
sequential two response signals cannot be received from the remote device. After that, the
Hot-Standby function switches the LAN port to the other LAN port (See Figure 10.1-2).
Following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for the setting [Ping_IP1]. (Setting IP
addresses in the other remote devices are not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Remote device with

Local IED Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
: 5sec : 1sec
OK: Response being done
1sec
5sec NG: due to delaying response
1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports are
performed if a response signal is
not received in setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 10.1-2 Time chart of example 1
- 269 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii)-2 Example operation 2

There are a remote device with Ping_IP1 address and another remote device with Ping_IP2.
The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet for respective remote devices alternately every
10 second. In other words, the IED sends ping packets for the same remote device every 20
second. In this case, number “2” is set for [Check_Count]. If any one of remote devices cannot
send a response, the Hot-standby function can determine the failure of communication after
40 second; then, the Hot-standby function executes to switch LAN ports (See Figure 10.1-3).
Following settings are required in this example 2:
・ The IP addresses of remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] and [Ping_IP2]. (Setting IP
addresses in the other remote devices are not required.)
・ 10sec is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Device with Ping_IP2
IED Device with Ping_IP1

Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response being done
5sec
10sec
5sec
10sec
5sec
10sec
Figure 10.1-3 Time chart of example 2
- 270 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10.1.2 Setting list

Setting of TCPIP (Function ID: 230201)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First decimal in IP at local IED 192
IP IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in IP at local IED 168
IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in IP at local IED 1
IP1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in IP at local IED 11
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – First decimal in subnet mask 255
SUB SM1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in subnet mask 255
NET SM1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in subnet mask 255
SM1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in subnet mask 1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – First decimal in gateway 192
GATE GW1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in gateway 168
WAY GW1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in gateway 1
GW1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in gateway 1
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off
Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – First decimal address in IP1 0
IP1 Ping_IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal address in IP1 0
- 271 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
RedandantMode Fixed / Hot_Standby – Selection of Hot-standby or not Fixed
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
Selection of any one of actual ports for
PrimaryPort None / Port1 /Port2 – None
the primary
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5
UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
- 272 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10.1.3 Data ID
NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link Port1 Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link Port2 Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH Using channel information
 Connection point in PLC logic

310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to CH1 from CH2

- 273 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10.2 IEC 61850 communication

Figure 10.2-1 shows there are IEDs and substation automation system (SAS) connected with
Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other apertures using the
international standard protocol (IEC 61850‡).
Figure 10.2-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:As starting 61850 communication, the user should map application signals with
logical-nodes (LNs) in the IED. We show the application signals as Data IDs in this
manual; hence, the user should connect the Data IDs with the LNs using an
engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided by TOSHIBA. For more information how to
map Data IDs (application signals) and operate GR-TIEMS, refer the other
manuals for GR-TIEMS and 61850 engineering. (See the separate instruction
manuals GR-TIMES (6F2M1082) and IEC61850 setup and configuration
(6F2S1906))
‡Note:For starting 61850 communication in the IED, the user should verify the 61850
capability by reviewing both protocol-implementation-conformance-statement
(PICS) and model-implementation-conformance-statement (MICS). The PICS
provides the user the information of LNs furnished in the IED; the PICS provides
the user other information so as the IED communicates with both SAS and others.
See appendixes in this manual so that the user can obtain the information.
- 274 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
10.2.1 How to set 61850 communication

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time in the case that the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED should to be authenticated for starting the 61850 communication, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the IED should not start the 61850 communication, the user should set scheme switch
[850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting keep-alive time on TCP

When the 61850 communication is carried out on TCP/IP, the user should set a time for
keepalive signal. The user should set the time in seconds using setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting CommTerm

If the user wishes to receive a CommTerm signal carrying an actual operation time from the
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
CommTerm signal will not conformity to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication made by
TOSHIBA.
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test of GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
(vi)-1 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the IED
not to send the GOOSE. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when there is conflict in the
communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal. To block sending the
GOOSE, the user should set On for scheme switch [GOSNDBLK].
(vi)-2 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE, the
user can make an IED not receive the GOOSE from another IED on the test; the user can
carry out the test setting On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects
the GOOSE from the other IEDs. The GOOSE receiving block function (GOSUBBLK) is also
- 275 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
useful for the validation of Interlock determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
10.2.2 How to monitor 61850 communication

The IED can monitor the state in 61850 communication. Discussing how to monitor the 61850
communication is provided separately. (See Chapter Automatic supervision)
10.2.3 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
Default setting
Range
value
1A 5A 1A 5A
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2
850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP KeepAlive time for IEC 61850 20
GOSNDBLK Off/On GOOSE publishing block Off
TCMD Off/On Set T in CommTerm as actual Time OFf
- 276 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11 User interface
- 277 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.1 Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through a USB port provided on the IED. This section
discusses the configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu
hierarchy of the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

As shown in Figure 11.1-1, the front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light
emitting diodes (LEDs), 11 operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the
function keys are referred to as F1 to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB port.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 11.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED
such as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu.
If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen backlight
by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen backlight
turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and the previous
menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
- 278 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) LEDs
As shown inTable 11.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
Table 11.1-1 LED labels and their color
LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED is
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LED #3 to LED #26 is user-configurable LEDs. User can assign a signal with or
without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section エラー! 参照元が見つかりません。.
(iv) Monitoring jacks

There are three monitoring jacks on the front panel; the three monitoring jacks have LEDs, A,
B, and C respectively. For example, if the user wishes to undertake test work1, two
monitoring-jacks (A and B) are available for use. By selecting the Data ID of an object signal
from the Data ID list, and by keying this Data ID into the IED, the object signal can be
displayed on the selected LEDs (A and B). The user can also observe this object signal at the
output of the monitoring jacks (A and B) on an oscilloscope.
- 279 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(v) USB connector

The USB port uses a B-type connector, with which a PC can be connected to the IED. (Prior to
USB operation, the user should install the GR-TIEMS software† onto a PC). By using the
USB port on the front panel, with a PC connected to the IED, the user can operate the IED
through the PC. Thus, the user can examine the following faults via the PC, and is able to
observe the following information on the PC screen.
• Display of voltage and current waveforms: Oscillographic, vector display
• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
†Note: For the operation and the driver installation of the software, see instruction
manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082).
(vi) Function keys

The IED provides seven function keys (F1 to F7) with the following two features. Table 11.1-2
shows the features for these keys.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See section
11.5(vi))
 Control the signal setting easily.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the signal
in the settings menu. (See section 11.5(vii))
Table 11.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)

Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
Skip to a specific screen directly.
F1 to F7 Control for the operation of pre-assigned
binary signals.
- 280 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(vii) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 11.1-3.
Table 11.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is only provided for MIMIC2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: MIMIC is the reference for the large LCD screen that is provided when a customer
orders it in place of the standard LCD screen; MIMIC is provided with the
mode/key. Note that the MIMIC key is not provided when the IED does not have
the large LCD screen.
- 281 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.2 HMI operation

By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key
except the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LED screen is turned on1.
If the IED detects a fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same
time, the “TRIP”2 LED is lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault
pop-up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by
the new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

(ii)-1 Menu hierarchy
Figure 11.2-1 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 11.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
- 282 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Main Menu Record Fault Record
Event Record 1
Event Record 2
Event Record 3
Disturbance Record
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering
Binary I/O
Communication
Relay Element
Statistics
GOOSE Monitoring1
Diagnostics
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection
Control
I/O Setting AC Analog Input
Binary Input
Binary Output
LED
Control
Time Clock
Time Zone
Time Sync
Display Format
Summer Time
Test Test Mode

Mode change
Information Signal Monitoring
Security setting Change Password

Login / Logout Security
Figure 11.2-1 Menu hierarchy
- 283 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 11.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
Record The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
Monitoring The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED,
such as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
Setting The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Metering, Communication and Protection.
I/O Setting The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
Time The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
Test The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
Information The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
hardware, software, communication, etc.
Security Setting The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
access.
Login/Logout When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
is displayed.
- 284 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii)-2 Outline of IED screen

 Main-menu
When the IED screen is turned off press any key, except the key CLEAR, and the
“Main-Menu" will appear on the LCD screen as shown in Figure 11.2-2. To go to the
next level of hierarchy, press the key ►.
Main Menu
10:48 1/8
_Record >
Monitoring >
Setting >
I/O Setting >
Time >
Test >
Figure 11.2-2 Display for Main-Menu
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown Figure 11.2-3. By using the key
▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward to view all of
the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous level of
hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
OC
10:48 2/4
OC1EN +>
On
_OC2EN +>
On
OC3EN +
Off
Figure 11.2-3 Display Example for Sub-Menu (OC setting)
 Screen structure
The LCD screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on
the top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the
left-hand side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the
current line number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the
item number. For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which
is at the second item of a maximum of four items.
- 285 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.3 Record sub-menu

The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, there are record lists and
clear records, with which the user can clear each kind of record separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 11.3-1 Display of Record
Table 11.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu

Display Operation Remark
key
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”. After
executing, a confirmation dialog screen is displayed.
(i) Fault Record

The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 11.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2 012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2 012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2 012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 11.3-2 Display of Fault Record
- 286 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i)-1 Display fault record

The following shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record 1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Fault Record 3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25 >
cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2 4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.

10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
Phase AB
Trip AB
OC1
53.4km (23%)
(i)-2 Clear fault record

The following shows the steps to clear the fault record list.
Record
10:48 1/6
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
- 287 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Fault Record
10:48 1/2 2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault
Clear records? Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
(i)-3 Clear all information in Fault Record

The following shows the steps to clear all the records.
Record 1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press
10:48 1/6
Fault Record > ENTER.
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
Clear Records 2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear All records? “Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
- 288 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 11.3-3 Display of Event Record
(ii)-1 Display of Event Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase event records. To clear all records, refer to
section (i)-3.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.

10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
- 289 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii)-2 Clear of Event Records

section (i)-3.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1 2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
10:48 1/2
Record List >
Records sub menu.
_Clear Records +
Event Record1 3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear records? Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the
entire disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 11.3-4 Display of Disturbance Record
The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To erase all records,
refer to (i)-3.
(iii)-1 Display of disturbance Record

section (i)-3.
- 290 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the

10:48 1/2
Record List sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
- 291 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii)-2 Clear of Disturbance Records

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To clear all records,
refer to section (i)-3.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the

Disturbance Record Clear Records sub menu.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to

Disturbance Record
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
- 292 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.4 Monitoring sub-menu

The “Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is
updated every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the
Monitoring sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu1
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
In the “Metering” sub-menu, the value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed.
The user can change the units as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 11.4-1
shows an example of the Metering sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 11.4-1 Display for Metering
Figure 11.4-2 shows the steps to display metering data on the LCD screen.
- 293 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting >
IO setting >
◄ _Binary I/O >
◄
Operation Time >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-2 Steps to display metering data
(ii) Binary I/O

The “Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO
module circuits. Each line on the IED screen displays the binary input or output signal
number, the signal name1 assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status.
The status is shown as logic level “1” or “0” for the binary output circuit. Figure 11.4-3
provides an example for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-3 Display of Binary I/O status
1Note: Names can be assigned to binary signals using GR-TIEMS.
- 294 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 11.4-4 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting >
IO setting >
◄ _Binary I/O >
◄ Slot#3 >
Operation Time > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
▼
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 11.4-4 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 11.4-5.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 11.4-5 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu
The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
(iii)-1 LAN sub-menu

In the “LAN” sub-menu, the communication port name and status are shown on one line.
When an IED model has one LAN port, or when the setting of dual-port communication is set
to non-operation (Off is set for scheme switch [RLNSCH]), the communication port status will
be as shown in Figure 11.4-6.
The “LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If “NetMonitor”
is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.
- 295 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 11.4-6 Display for LAN
If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working; if the
status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to the port.
As shown in Figure 11.4-7, the following two sub-menus are displayed to show the
communication status for a model with dual LAN ports. The setting of dual-port
communication should be set to “Enable”.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
One port is connected. Two ports are connected.
Figure 11.4-7 Communication status
(iii)-2 IEC61850 sub-menu

In the “IEC61850” sub-menu, IP addresses of the devices connecting using IEC61850 are
shown in one line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available from GR-TIEMS.
- 296 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 11.4-8 Display of IEC61850
(iv) Relay Elements

In the “Relay Element” sub-menu, the name of the relay element and status of operation are
shown on one line. The following figure provides an example for the OC elements screen. In
order to view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 11.4-9 Displaying Relay Elements
Figure 11.4-10 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring
elements on the LCD screen.
- 297 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/9 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Metering > ► CBF >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > EFP >
Setting > Communication > _OC >
IO setting >
◄ _Relay Element > ◄ EF >
Time > Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 11.4-10 Steps to display the status of measuring elements
(v) Statistics
The “Statistics” sub-menu is provided with several sub-menus, as shown in the following
figure.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Power value
Counter
Accumulated Time
Figure 11.4-11 Menu hierarchy for Statistics
For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised. The display structure of each sub-menu is shown in the following sections:
(v)-1 Power Value sub-menu

With regard to statistics item, its name and its value are shown in the figure below. The user
can also change the unit of each value by the setting1. It is allowed to reset or revise the
statistics value.2
- 298 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 11.4-12 Display of Power Value
Table 11.4-1 Operation means for data reset or data revise

Step Display Operation key Remark
1 [>] ► Press ► key to go to the sub-menu
Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise.
2 [+] ENTER After executing, a confirmation dialog screen
displays.
1Note: In order to secure the reliability, the reset and revision items are controlled by the
vendor.
2Note: The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kW,
MW and kvar+. For instance when the power is measured as "123,456kW" then it
is displayed as "123MW". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a
new compensated value. For example, if "78MW" should be displayed on the IED
screen even though the measured value is "123,456kW" then the user should key in
the new value of "78MW". Note that the compensated value "78MW" is "78,000kW",
and it is not "78,456kW" or "123,456kW". Note that the compensated value will be
affected when there is a change in CT ratio setting. That is, when the user key in a
value of "78MW" for the CT ratio of "2000:1" and later when the CT ratio is
changed from "2000:1" to "4000:1", then the value is displayed as "156MW" on the
IED screen. Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed, the user should key in
the value of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
(v)-2 Counter sub-menu

For each item in the Counter sub-menu, the name and number of statistical items are shown
in two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first line.
- 299 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 11.4-13 Display for Counter sub-menu
To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.4-14.
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/2
Record > ► Metering > ► _Counter >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > Accumulated Time >
◄
Setting > Communication >
IO Setting > Relay Element >
◄
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
▲
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/8
Change? ENTER ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND + ENTER ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
ARC1_SPAR + ARC1_SPAR +
1 0
ARC1_TPAR + ARC1_TPAR +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/8
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
0
ARC1_SPAR +
The data is revised. 1
ARC1_TPAR +
0
Figure 11.4-14 Steps for changing the counter number
(v)-3 Accumulated Time sub-menu

In the “Accumulated Time” sub-menu, the name and the total time over which the statistical
item has run are shown in two lines. The total time is displayed for each statistical item in “d
(date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear each value of accumulated time using
the clear step (reset) is shown in Figure 11.4-15.
- 300 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 11.4-15 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.4-16. Each IED name (for example, “GRD200-11-603”) has been defined in the
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRD200-11-603 OK
GRD200-21-603 OK
GRD200-31-603 NG
Figure 11.4-16 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Errors are shown for each monitoring element. If there are no errors, an error message is not
displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error >
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 11.4-17 Display for Diagnostics
- 301 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.5 Setting sub-menu

The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions:
Recording, Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this
section, we show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection
setting”, and others.
Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”
function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
(i)-1 Element Setting Mode

The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting numerical values. For each setting, the setting
name, setting value and the unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 11.5-1 provides an
example of the element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the change is canceled or
confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For the setting of a value, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 11.5-21:
- 302 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000
[CANCEL]
1.00000 [►] x 5 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER]
*OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 11.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 11.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
- 303 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 11.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9 1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
[►]
2 1 : 2 3 2 1 : 2 3
(i)-2 Switch Setting Mode

The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the selection of two modes. Figure 11.5-3
provides an example of the switch setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the
selected item are displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed, the [*]
mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed,
the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 11.5-4 shows the operation of the switch
setting mode.
- 304 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼]
Block Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 11.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
(i)-3 List Selection Mode

The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-screens and selection-list-screens as
shown in Figure 11.5-5. In the main-setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item
are displayed. Press the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for selection list
will appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of
the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear
automatically.
- 305 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 11.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
(i)-4 Signal Selection Mode

Figure 11.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 11.5-6 Operation of signal selection
- 306 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 11.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

When a setting within each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 11.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
When a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Main Menu”, as shown in Figure 11.5-9.
- 307 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group >
[►] Telecommunication >
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 11.5-8 Setting example in case #1
- 308 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 >
[◄]
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103 >
IO Setting > Protection >
[◄]
Modbus >
Time > Counter > DNP >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] 850BLK +
[ENTER] _850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON
[►] Modbus >
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
[CANCEL]
Counter > canceled.
Function key >
Figure 11.5-9 Setting example in case #2
- 309 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +>
[ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed setting [ENTER] ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
is confirmed. [◄] x 3
OC2EN +
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 11.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 11.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
- 310 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. However, it is not possible to set the protection
function in the “Protection” sub-menu.
(iv)-1 Change active group

An example for changing the active group is shown in the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed setting [►]
Active Group >
is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection”

sub-menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 11.5-11 Operation of changing active group
(iv)-2 Copy group setting

The user can copy an active setting from one group to another group. As an example, in the
following figure “Group3” will be copied to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 11.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
- 311 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common
[►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
1 [◄]
B (1 - 8): +
[▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed setting
is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 11.5-12 Copy group setting
(iv)-3 Change group settings

Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings are set. Therefore, in each group, the
user can change the settings of the protection functions and other features. To change the
settings in each group, refer to the setting method discussed in section 11.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. This key can also control a particular signal, which
- 312 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
turns on the LED light. The signal can be selected through operation of the HMI or
GR-TIEMS. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6), respectively, as
the default settings shown in Table 11.5-3.
Table 11.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
(vi) Screen jump function

To navigate to another screen, press a function key; a configured screen will be displayed
directly. The configuration “Screen Jump” can be selected from seven function keys. When the
user configures a function key as “Screen Jump”, this function key will be activated. Any
screen, which appears within three seconds when pressed, can be chosen as “Screen Jump”,
except the confirmation dialog screen.
Note: There may be a function key that has not been is assigned. To avoid confusion,
momentarily press a function key; the screen that is set will appear.
To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps as shown in the figure below.
- 313 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal +
[CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Kye?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen
is assigned to [F1].
Figure 11.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
[F1]
IO setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 11.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 11.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
- 314 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
screen is configured for the same function key.

2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
11.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal + [CANCEL] No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 11.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function
(vii) Signal control function

The user can also control some signals and execute some functions. In addition to assigning
signals to the function key, the operator can also set “Toggle” or “Instant” for the operation of
the function key.
To assign a signal to a function key, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.5-16.
- 315 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal +
[CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed setting Change Setting? *Signal +
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 123101AF00003001
Logic +
Instant
Figure 11.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key
- 316 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.6 Information sub-menu

In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory, and not changed by the user. Figure 11.6-1 shows the
Information sub-menu. Table 11.6-1 shows detail of information that is displayed in this
screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
GRG200
__-00-111-22-33-44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 11.6-1 Information screen
Table 11.6-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
GRx200 Product name
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Hardware section information of ordering number
-****-***-** Software section information of ordering number
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
No name Plant name which is input from GR-TIEMS by the user
[Description]
Information of the IED which is input from GR TIEMS by the
No name
user
[CP1M Software]
************ Name and version number of Main CPU Software
[CP1S Software]
************ Name and version number of Sub CPU Software
[CP2M Software]
************ Name and version number of extra CPU Software(This item is
displayed in case of extra CPU implemented model only)
[IEC61850 eng]
********* Name and version number of IEC61850 engine (This item is
displayed in case of IEC61850 implemented model only)
[IEC61850 Date Model]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model (This item is
- 317 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Display item Remark

[IEC61850 Mapping]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping (This item is
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No Data GOOSE Subscript (This item is displayed in case of IEC61850
implemented model only)
Interlock Data
******************** Setting data of interlock (This item is displayed in case of
interlock function implemented model only)
[PLC Date]
************ PLC Data name and version number
[Command Block Data]
******************** Double command block data
- 318 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.7 Time sub-menu

In the Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of time function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time display and so on. Figure 11.7-1 shows the Time
sub-menu.
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 11.7-1 Time function screen
(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 11.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 11.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is
SNTP, the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
The following shows how to operate in this screen.
(i)-1 Time menu

Time can change by the following procedure.
Clock (1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
- 319 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Clock (2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(i)-2 ActiveSyncSrc menu

ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
Clock (1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.

10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format] *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the >
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss is not shown in the screen.
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
ActiveSyncSrc (2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of

10:48
192. 168. 0. 100 active SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set.
Figure 11.7-3 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 11.7-3 Time zone setting screen

The following shows how to operate using this screen.
- 320 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii)-1 Time zone menu

Time zone can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Zone (1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/1
_Time zone + Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time
0.00hour
zone in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 11.7-4 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 11.7-4 Time synchronization setting
The following shows how to operate in this screen.
(iii)-1 TimeSyncSrc menu

Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Sync 1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
TimeSyncSrc 2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI,

10:48 1/5
--- MODBUS and IRIG-B.
_SNTP
BI
MODBUS
Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization is
IRIG-B
not operated.
- 321 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the
servers can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of
higher-accuracy) and select the server with the smallest value.
(iii)-2 SNTP menu

IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function is set for
TimeSyncSrc + On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP 2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.

10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP 3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.

10:48 1/4
Server1 +
When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
(iii)-3 BI SYNC menu

When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in BI SYNC menu, the user can assign a binary signal data
ID as a synchronization standard. An adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided for the time
standard.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC 1) First of all, to select slot ID of IED

10:48 1/2
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
- 322 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The “IRIG SYNC” setting is similar to activate by using the On/Off switch.
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 11.7-5 shows an example of display format:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 11.7-5 Display format

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter menu
Time_delimiter menu and Sec_delimiter menu.
(iv)-1 Date format menu

Date display format can be changed by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the Date_fmt menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_fmt (2) Date display format can be selected by moving cursor to the
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD desired format type.
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
- 323 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv)-2 Date delimiter menu

Date delimiter can be changed by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
10:48 1/3
_- format type.
/
.
(iv)-3 Time delimiter menu

Time delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.

10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
- 324 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iv)-4 Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
Display Format (2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
(v) Summer time

The IED provides summer time configuration. In this screen, summer time of each area using
the IED can be set. When the Summer Time configuration is On, the details for summer time
can be set as shown in Figure 11.7-6:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 11.7-6 Summer time

Summer time sub-menu is composed of Summer time menu.
(v)-1 Summer Time menu

The user should notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure if the IED is
used in summertime clock.
If summertime is started or ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week
must be filled “5”. The IED controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of
the month on Start_Week or End_Week automatically.
Note the user have to change Summer time mode to On before setting summer time.
- 325 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
(1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
_Summer time + Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
Off
After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer
time in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time.
The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday) (2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 (3) Starting weekday is set.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
- 326 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.8 Test sub-menu

Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen

The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 11.8-1 Test screen
(ii) Test mode screen

The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 11.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 11.8-2 Test Mode screen

(ii)-1 Test option screen
The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 11.8-3, is used to select the following functions and
perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 11.8-3 Test Option screen
- 327 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
• Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)

This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication packet. The Test flag
is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in combination with another device in the Test
mode. When this option is selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset
temporarily to reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
• GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending information in Test mode.
This function is used when there is a conflict in communication with another active IED while
sending a GOOSE signal.
• GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another
IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing in case of bad reception (For example,
Validation of Interlock determination). The user can simulate a bad reception condition
passively by using two GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid this the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED under
test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
(ii)-2 Function test screen

Function test screen is used for IED test or for configuring the test environment. This function
is used to configure the available test operations implemented in the protection and control
functions. Figure 11.8-4 shows one example; the actual screen will vary according to IED
model. For example, automatic monitoring function (A.M.F.†) can be found at the top of Figure
11.8-4. The user can block this function when the A.M.F is set to Off..
- 328 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 11.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
(ii)-3 Binary input test screen

The user can apply a virtual signal to a binary input circuit using the binary input test screen.
Figure 11.8-5 shows an example; the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content
displayed will differ depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter CU
feature: Technical description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-5 Binary input menu
Figure 11.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 11.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module
For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI01) in the BIO1A
module (BIO1A) at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown in Figure
11.8-6).
- 329 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the items
required for simulation.
• ON: BI01 circuit is forced to ON(1) regardless of the actual input signal.
• OFF: BI01 circuit is forced to OFF regardless of the actual input signal.
• Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 11.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the simulation
test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 11.8-7, if the
user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the screen shown in
Figure 11.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner similar to that described for
BI01.
Upon selection of BI3F OP in Figure 11.8-6, use the following screen to initiate the
simulation test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 11.8-8 Execution menu of BI test
If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 11.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 11.8-9 shows that the
IED is in simulation test mode.
- 330 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 11.8-9 Running test menu
Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
(ii)-4 Binary output test screen

This function can be enabled to control a binary output circuit using GR-TIEMS. The signals
used for the binary outputs can be simulated.
Figure 11.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test Mode screen.
(Figure 11.8-2. This figure shows the binary output circuits at IO#2 and IO#3.)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-10 Binary output menu
Figure 11.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 11.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 11.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2). The
- 331 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit. (Refer to Figure
11.8-7 to Figure 11.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary output
circuit.
• ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
• OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
• Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should
select TestFlag-EN in Figure 11.8-1 and select On or Off.
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 11.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 11.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 11.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 11.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring
jacks (A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
- 332 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 11.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-15 Selection menu
- 333 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.9 Information sub-menu

In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory, and not changed by the user. Figure 11.6-1 shows the
Information sub-menu. Table 11.6-1 shows detail of information that is displayed in this
screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00
__-00-111-22-33-44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 11.9-1 Information screen
Table 11.9-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00 Product name
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Hardware section information of ordering number
-****-***-** Software section information of ordering number
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
No name Plant name which is input from GR-TIEMS by the user
[Description]
Information of the IED which is input from GR TIEMS by the
No name
user
[CP1M Software]
************ Name and version number of Main CPU Software
[CP1S Software]
************ Name and version number of Sub CPU Software
[CP2M Software]
************ Name and version number of extra CPU Software(This item is
displayed in case of extra CPU implemented model only)
[IEC61850 eng]
********* Name and version number of IEC61850 engine (This item is
[IEC61850 Date Model]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model (This item is
- 334 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Display item Remark

[IEC61850 Mapping]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping (This item is
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No Data GOOSE Subscript (This item is displayed in case of IEC61850
implemented model only)
Interlock Data
******************** Setting data of interlock (This item is displayed in case of
interlock function implemented model only)
[PLC Date]
************ PLC Data name and version number
[Command Block Data]
******************** Double command block data
- 335 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.10 Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords,
active or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID using GR-TIEMS.
Table 11.10-1 shows the settings of the configurable access control function. Table 11.10-2
shows the allowed operation items.
Table 11.10-1 Access control function settings

Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID (Default) Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security
N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Setting
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function
Monitoring
keys) N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
allowed to
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
operate
F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function.
- 336 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 11.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
- 337 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
11.11 Control sub-menu

The user can control external devices using the IED front panel. As control sub-menus on the
IED screen are provided to operate the devices, the users can operate respective devices by
pressing the IED operation keys. The user should notice that the control sub-menus are only
available when the operation is carried out on “LOCAL” mode in the IED. If the IED is on
“REMOTE” mode, the user cannot operate them; an error message is shown on the IED screen.
If the user does not operate them for some duration, the mode on the IED will be changed to
“REMOTE” from “LOCAL”. This is because a sever, which is supervise the IEDs, requests to
control or monitor the IED remotely.
Note: The mode on the IED is just changed automatically when the following menus are
displayed on the IED screen: “Main Menu”, “Control sub-menu”, “Selection
Executing”, “Operating completed”, “Operating canceled” or “Operating failed”.
Table 11.11-1 shows how to operate the devices using the IED front panel; it shows the
key operation differs on between DIR mode and SBO mode. The user should understand that
the following controlling functions† are provided in the IED, but the implemented functions
are different among every IED models. The user can check which functions are implemented
into the user’s IED (check the ordering code for the IED and see the function tables in
Appendix: Ordering).
†Note:The following controlling functions may be furnished into the IED:

1 Double point status device control with synchronization (DPSY)
2 Single point status device control (SPOS)
3 Software switch control (SOFTSW). SOFTSW contains Control block (CMDBLK),
Interlock bypass (ILKBYP), Synchronization bypass (SYNCBYP) and Soft switch
(S4301 to S4305) functions.
Table 11.11-1 Control step in DIR mode or SBO mode

Control Scheme Operation step
Direct Control 1) Set DIR mode in each control function.
Operation (DIR) 2) Select a device and choose DIR, and press the key ENTER.
Mode 3) Press the key I (Close) or the key O (Open)
4) A signal of control command is issued, and control operation is
carried out.
Select Before 1) Set SBO mode in each control function.
Control Operation 2) Select a device and choose SBO, and press the key ENTER..
(SBO) Mode 3) Verify that the selection is performed correctly and normally.
4) Press the key I (Close) or the key O (Open); after that the
controlling command is issued.
5) Control operation is carried out.
- 338 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Figure 11.11-1 shows an an example of “Control” sub-menu.
Control
10:48 1/6
_CB +
CLOSE
DS +
CLOSE
43C +
ON
EDS +
CLOSE
TAP +
10
DCAO +
-222222.2222Mvarh
Figure 11.11-1 Display of Control
- 339 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i) Control operation to Open or Close

Figure 11.11-1 shows how to control devices open/close or on/off:
Control CB
10:48 1/6 10:48
_CB + [ENTER] Current status:
[ENTER]
CLOSE CLOSE
DS +
[CANCEL] Select control POS:
CLOSE _OPEN
43C + Change status?
ON ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
EDS + No Double
CLOSE responses?
TAP +
10 Yes
DCAO + Executing screen
-222222.2222Mvarh
CB Output the command
10:48
Control execution
Push O button
Select control POS: Waiting for the
OPEN second response
CANCEL:Operation stop CB
10:48
Selecting...
Selecting succeeded.
CB
10:48
Operation failed.
CAUSE:
Select failed. Selecting failed.
Figure 11.11-2 Control steps for open/close (or On/Off)
- 340 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(ii) Control operation to Execution

Figure 11.11-3 shows how to execute the control:
CB
10:48
Control execution
Push O button [CANCEL]
Select control POS:
OPEN
CANCEL:Operation stop
Controlling failed
CB
10:48
Controlling... [CANCEL]
Cancel failed Cancel succeeded.

Time out
Within
32min1
CB CB CB CB
10:48 10:48 10:48 10:48
Operation completed. Operation failed. Operation failed. Operation canceled.
CAUSE: CAUSE:
Time limit over. Select failed.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
Control Control
10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
_CB + _CB +
OPEN CLOSE
DS + DS +
CLOSE CLOSE
43C + 43C +
ON ON
EDS + EDS +
CLOSE CLOSE
TAP + TAP +
10 10
DCAO + DCAO +
-222222.2222Mvarh -222222.2222Mvarh
Figure 11.11-3 Control steps for execution

1Note: The time out limitation is 32min. It is defined from starting controlling until
getting the response.
- 341 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(iii) Control operation to change

Figure 11.11-4 shows how to change parameters of devices:
Control DCAO
10:48 6/6 10:48
TAP + [ENTER] Current output:
10 -123456.7890Mvarh
_DCAO +
[CANCEL] Set change output:
-123456.7890Mvarh -123456.7890Mvarh
Change output?
ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
[ ]X4
DCAO DCAO
10:48 10:48
Current output:
[ ] Current output:
-123456.7890Mvarh -123456.7890Mvarh
Set change output: Set change output:
-123457.7890Mvarh -123456.7890Mvarh
Change output? Change output?
ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
[ENTER]
Double No
responses?
Yes
Executing screen
Output the command

DCAO
10:48
Control execution
Push | button Refer to the route
Waiting for the Set change output of executing the
second response -123457.7890Mvarh operating.
DCAO
10:48
Selecting...
Selecting succeeded.
DCAO
10:48
Operation failed.
Selecting failed. CAUSE:

Select failed.
Figure 11.11-4 Control steps for change
- 342 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
12 Installation
- 343 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The user should carry out the acceptance inspection promptly as an IED is arrived at the
installation site, and check on damage during transportation particularly. If any damage is
found, the user should be required to contact a vendor about the damage. What is more, it is
required to check accessories, which consist of monitoring cables and two flange covers. The
monitoring cables include four jacks and are used for testing. The two flange covers, which are
colored blue, are used to cover the mounting bolts of the IED; they include four hole covers
and screws. Note that the IED is stored in a clean, dry environment at all times.
(i) Rack mounting

Startup is to mounting the IED into the rack. After that, cover the mounting bolts with the
two flange covers.
(ii) Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out any modules out of the case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with bare hands. Additionally,
always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
(iii) Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potential of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic
circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the
reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in
the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each
module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However,
if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, precautions should be taken to preserve the
high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
CAUTION
• Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
• Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
• Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the
same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
- 344 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
• Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the

same potential as yourself.
• Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be

carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the IEC 60747.
(iv) External Connections

External connections are shown in a subsequent appendix.
Electrical interface for telecommunication

The connector should be handled as follows:
• Insert the connector horizontally and tighten both upper Connector
and lower screws alternately.

• Do not touch the connector pin with your bare hand.
Screw
In electrical interface to multiplexed communication circuit for the IED, the earthing wire of
electrical cable is connected to the earth terminal (E) of the relay, if required.
Optical interface for telecommunication

The optical cables tend to come down, therefore, bending requires special attention.
Handling instructions of optical cable are as follows:
№ Instructions
1 Do not insert the connector obliquely.
2 Tighten the connector when connecting.
3 Do not pull the cable.
4 Do not bend the cable.
- 345 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
5 Do not bend the neck of the connector.
6 Do not twist the cable.
7 Do not kink in the cable.
8 Do not put and drop on the cable.
9 Do not bend the cable to (*)mm or less in radius.
(*)Length differs from characteristics of optical

cable.
- 346 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
13 Commissioning and Maintenance
- 347 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The IED is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the IED or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general function of IED testing practices and safety
precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
- 348 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
13.1 Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
• When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
• Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
• Class 1M laser radiation when remove cap for models with <30km class optical
interface. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
• While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
• Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or
overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
- 349 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
13.2 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the IED.
GR-TIEMS software is required on the PC.
- 350 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
(i) Hardware Tests

On commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe the movement of
relay elements. The IED is equipped the feature of signal monitor and you can check the
operation whether the movement is appropriate or not. In this section, checking points of wire
connection and signaling are discussed.
(ii) IED External connections

AC and DC input
Power supply Terminal VCT module terminal
Figure 13.2-1 External connection at rear of the IED
- 351 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Table 13.2-1 Terminal number for AC input and DC input

Power DC VCT AC inputs
supply input module
module terminal Input assignment when VCT
terminal type 32 is applied.
1 – 1-2 NA
2 – 3-4 NA
3 – 5-6 NA
4 – 7-8 I1(IL1) A phase current
5 – 9-10 I2(IL2) B
6 – 11-12 I3(IL3) C
7 – 13-14 I4(Ie) Residual current
8 – 15-16 I5(Ie) Residual current
9 – 17-18 I6(Ise) Residual current
10 – 19-20 NA
21-22 NA
23-24 NA
25-26 NA
27-28 NA
29-30 NA
27 –
28 –
29 P
30 –
31 N
32 –
33 –
34 –
35 –
36 –
37 –
38 FG
39 –
40 –
- 352 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function
- 353 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
Name Element ID Description
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001

GENCNT GENCNT GENCNT
GENCNT GENCNT GENCNT
- 354 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

CHK_ACC1 (Function ID: 220E01)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 executing counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_FAST 3210021001 check result(fast)
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_BIO1 (Function ID: 221101)

CHK_CB1 (Function ID: 222001)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 executing conuter

CHK_CMLV_DAT (Function ID: 224001)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 executing conuter

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)

CHK_DPRAM (Function ID: 221601)
- 355 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

CHK_DPRAM (Function ID: 221601)

CHK_DS (Function ID: 222101)

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
CHKPOINT 32E0001001 test point
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 check result
RESULT 3210001001 check result(instant)
RES_INST 3210011001 executing counter

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)
- 356 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223201)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
CHKPOINT 30E0001001 test point1
CHKPOINT2 30E0011001 test point2

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
ECC_SECNT 3210021001 ECC single error cnt

CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
- 357 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)


CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_SUBCPU (Function ID: 220901)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
CHECKSUM 3210101001
CHECKSUMC 3210111001
CHK_POINT 32E0001001
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001
LOADERSUM 3210201001
PROG_SIZE 3210121001
RESULT 3210001001
RES_INST 3210011001
- 358 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

61850 (Function ID: 301001)
61850STAT 0010001001 Status of IEC 61850(T: Running, F: Stop)
INCOMINGPKT#0 3100001440 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
OUTGOINGPKT#0 3100001441 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
REMOTEPORTNUM#0 3100001001 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI10F OP 3119001198 BI10 forced operate start
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
BI15F OP 311E001198 BI15 forced operate start
BI16F OP 311F001198 BI16 forced operate start
- 359 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

CHK_PING1 (Function ID: 223601)

CHK_PING2 (Function ID: 223602))

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220
C0_N16 2100001129
C0_N32 220000112A
C0_N64 230000112B
C0_N8 2000001128
C0_S16 2100001121
C0_S32 2200001122
C0_S64 2300001123
C0_S8 2000001120
C0_U16 3100001125
C0_U32 3200001126
C0_U64 3300001127
C0_U8 3000001124
C100_S16 2100641121
C100_S32 2200641122
C100_S8 2000641120
C100_U16 3100641125
C100_U32 3200641126
C100_U8 3000641124
C10_S16 21000A1121
C10_S32 22000A1122
C10_S8 20000A1120
C10_U16 31000A1125
C10_U32 32000A1126
C10_U8 30000A1124
C11_S16 21000B1121
C11_S32 22000B1122
C11_S8 20000B1120
C11_U16 31000B1125
- 360 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C11_U32 32000B1126
C11_U8 30000B1124
C12_S16 21000C1121
C12_S32 22000C1122
C12_S8 20000C1120
C12_U16 31000C1125
C12_U32 32000C1126
C12_U8 30000C1124
C13_S16 21000D1121
C13_S32 22000D1122
C13_S8 20000D1120
C13_U16 31000D1125
C13_U32 32000D1126
C13_U8 30000D1124
C14_S16 21000E1121
C14_S32 22000E1122
C14_S8 20000E1120
C14_U16 31000E1125
C14_U32 32000E1126
C14_U8 30000E1124
C15_S16 21000F1121
C15_S32 22000F1122
C15_S8 20000F1120
C15_U16 31000F1125
C15_U32 32000F1126
C15_U8 30000F1124
C16_S16 2100101121
C16_S32 2200101122
C16_S8 2000101120
C16_U16 3100101125
C16_U32 3200101126
C16_U8 3000101124
C17_S16 2100111121
C17_S32 2200111122
C17_S8 2000111120
C17_U16 3100111125
C17_U32 3200111126
C17_U8 3000111124
C18_S16 2100121121
C18_S32 2200121122
C18_S8 2000121120
C18_U16 3100121125
C18_U32 3200121126
C18_U8 3000121124
- 361 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C19_S16 2100131121
C19_S32 2200131122
C19_S8 2000131120
C19_U16 3100131125
C19_U32 3200131126
C19_U8 3000131124
C1_BIT 8000011220
C1_N16 2100011129
C1_N32 220001112A
C1_N64 230001112B
C1_N8 2000011128
C1_S16 2100011121
C1_S32 2200011122
C1_S64 2300011123
C1_S8 2000011120
C1_U16 3100011125
C1_U32 3200011126
C1_U64 3300011127
C1_U8 3000011124
C20_S16 2100141121
C20_S32 2200141122
C20_S8 2000141120
C20_U16 3100141125
C20_U32 3200141126
C20_U8 3000141124
C21_S16 2100151121
C21_S32 2200151122
C21_S8 2000151120
C21_U16 3100151125
C21_U32 3200151126
C21_U8 3000151124
C22_S16 2100161121
C22_S32 2200161122
C22_S8 2000161120
C22_U16 3100161125
C22_U32 3200161126
C22_U8 3000161124
C23_S16 2100171121
C23_S32 2200171122
C23_S8 2000171120
C23_U16 3100171125
C23_U32 3200171126
C23_U8 3000171124
C24_S16 2100181121
- 362 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C24_S32 2200181122
C24_S8 2000181120
C24_U16 3100181125
C24_U32 3200181126
C24_U8 3000181124
C25_S16 2100191121
C25_S32 2200191122
C25_S8 2000191120
C25_U16 3100191125
C25_U32 3200191126
C25_U8 3000191124
C26_S16 21001A1121
C26_S32 22001A1122
C26_S8 20001A1120
C26_U16 31001A1125
C26_U32 32001A1126
C26_U8 30001A1124
C27_S16 21001B1121
C27_S32 22001B1122
C27_S8 20001B1120
C27_U16 31001B1125
C27_U32 32001B1126
C27_U8 30001B1124
C28_S16 21001C1121
C28_S32 22001C1122
C28_S8 20001C1120
C28_U16 31001C1125
C28_U32 32001C1126
C28_U8 30001C1124
C29_S16 21001D1121
C29_S32 22001D1122
C29_S8 20001D1120
C29_U16 31001D1125
C29_U32 32001D1126
C29_U8 30001D1124
C2_S16 2100021121
C2_S32 2200021122
C2_S8 2000021120
C2_U16 3100021125
C2_U32 3200021126
C2_U8 3000021124
C30_S16 21001E1121
C30_S32 22001E1122
C30_S8 20001E1120
- 363 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C30_U16 31001E1125
C30_U32 32001E1126
C30_U8 30001E1124
C31_S16 21001F1121
C31_S32 22001F1122
C31_S8 20001F1120
C31_U16 31001F1125
C31_U32 32001F1126
C31_U8 30001F1124
C32_S16 2100201121
C32_S32 2200201122
C32_S8 2000201120
C32_U16 3100201125
C32_U32 3200201126
C32_U8 3000201124
C3_S16 2100031121
C3_U32 3200031126
C3_U8 3000031124
C40_S16 2100281121
C40_S32 2200281122
C40_S8 2000281120
C40_U16 3100281125
C40_U32 3200281126
C40_U8 3000281124
C4_S16 2100041121
C4_S32 2200041122
C4_S8 2000041120
C4_U16 3100041125
C4_U32 3200041126
C4_U8 3000041124
C50_S16 2100321121
C50_S32 2200321122
C50_S8 2000321120
C50_U16 3100321125
C50_U32 3200321126
C50_U8 3000321124
C5_S16 2100051121
C5_S32 2200051122
C5_S8 2000051120
C5_U16 3100051125
C5_U32 3200051126
C5_U8 3000051124
C60_S16 21003C1121
C60_S32 22003C1122
- 364 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C60_S8 20003C1120
C60_U16 31003C1125
C60_U32 32003C1126
C60_U8 30003C1124
C6_S16 2100061121
C6_S32 2200061122
C6_S8 2000061120
C6_U16 3100061125
C6_U32 3200061126
C6_U8 3000061124
C70_S16 2100461121
C70_S32 2200461122
C70_S8 2000461120
C70_U16 3100461125
C70_U32 3200461126
C70_U8 3000461124
C7_S16 2100071121
C7_S32 2200071122
C7_S8 2000071120
C7_U16 3100071125
C7_U32 3200071126
C7_U8 3000071124
C80_S16 2100501121
C80_S32 2200501122
C80_S8 2000501120
C80_U16 3100501125
C80_U32 3200501126
C80_U8 3000501124
C8_S16 2100081121
C8_S32 2200081122
C8_S8 2000081120
C8_U16 3100081125
C8_U32 3200081126
C8_U8 3000081124
C90_S16 21005A1121
C90_S32 22005A1122
C90_S8 20005A1120
C90_U16 31005A1125
C90_U32 32005A1126
C90_U8 30005A1124
C9_S16 2100091121
C9_S32 2200091122
C9_S8 2000091120
C9_U16 3100091125
- 365 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

C9_U32 3200091126
C9_U8 3000091124

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
DSTRING 80A0041001
DSTR_CLR 30A0001001
DSTR_MADE 80A0031001
DSTR_MAX 32A0011001
DSTR_NUM 32A0021001

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001
ER2_CLR 3002001001
ER3_CLR 3003001001

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001
FLTRCDING 8020101001
FR_CLR 3000001001

GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE to be subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality for record #0
- 366 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality for record #10
31000B1001 SUB_QUAL#11 GOOSE subscription quality for record #11
31000C1001 SUB_QUAL#12 GOOSE subscription quality for record #12
31000D1001 SUB_QUAL#13 GOOSE subscription quality for record #13
31000E1001 SUB_QUAL#14 GOOSE subscription quality for record #14
31000F1001 SUB_QUAL#15 GOOSE subscription quality for record #15
- 367 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

- 368 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

- 369 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

3100AA1001 SUB_QUAL#170 GOOSE subscription quality for record #170
3100AB1001 SUB_QUAL#171 GOOSE subscription quality for record #171
3100AC1001 SUB_QUAL#172 GOOSE subscription quality for record #172
3100AD1001 SUB_QUAL#173 GOOSE subscription quality for record #173
3100AE1001 SUB_QUAL#174 GOOSE subscription quality for record #174
3100AF1001 SUB_QUAL#175 GOOSE subscription quality for record #175
- 370 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

3100BA1001 SUB_QUAL#186 GOOSE subscription quality for record #186
3100BB1001 SUB_QUAL#187 GOOSE subscription quality for record #187
3100BC1001 SUB_QUAL#188 GOOSE subscription quality for record #188
3100BD1001 SUB_QUAL#189 GOOSE subscription quality for record #189
3100BE1001 SUB_QUAL#190 GOOSE subscription quality for record #190
3100BF1001 SUB_QUAL#191 GOOSE subscription quality for record #191
3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality for record #202
3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality for record #203
3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality for record #204
3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL#205 GOOSE subscription quality for record #205
3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL#206 GOOSE subscription quality for record #206
3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL#207 GOOSE subscription quality for record #207
3100DA1001 SUB_QUAL#218 GOOSE subscription quality for record #218
3100DB1001 SUB_QUAL#219 GOOSE subscription quality for record #219
3100DC1001 SUB_QUAL#220 GOOSE subscription quality for record #220
3100DD1001 SUB_QUAL#221 GOOSE subscription quality for record #221
3100DE1001 SUB_QUAL#222 GOOSE subscription quality for record #222
3100DF1001 SUB_QUAL#223 GOOSE subscription quality for record #223
- 371 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

3100EA1001 SUB_QUAL#234 GOOSE subscription quality for record #234
3100EB1001 SUB_QUAL#235 GOOSE subscription quality for record #235
3100EC1001 SUB_QUAL#236 GOOSE subscription quality for record #236
3100ED1001 SUB_QUAL#237 GOOSE subscription quality for record #237
3100EE1001 SUB_QUAL#238 GOOSE subscription quality for record #238
3100EF1001 SUB_QUAL#239 GOOSE subscription quality for record #239
3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL#250 GOOSE subscription quality for record #250
3100FB1001 SUB_QUAL#251 GOOSE subscription quality for record #251
3100FC1001 SUB_QUAL#252 GOOSE subscription quality for record #252
3100FD1001 SUB_QUAL#253 GOOSE subscription quality for record #253
3100FE1001 SUB_QUAL#254 GOOSE subscription quality for record #254
3100FF1001 SUB_QUAL#255 GOOSE subscription quality for record #255
- 372 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

- 373 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)


HOT_ST (Function ID: 341001)
PORT1_LINK 3100061001 Port1 Link Status
PORT2_LINK 3100071001 Port2 Link Status
USING_CH 3100081001 Using channel information

KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
CANCEL 3100081730 Key situation of CANCEL
CLEAR 31000E1730 Key situation of CLEAR
CLOSE 31000D1730 Key situation of CLOSE
DOWN 31000F1730 Key situation of DOWN
ENTER 3100071730 Key situation of ENTER
FUNC-KEY1 3100001730 Key situation of FUNC-KEY1
HELP 3100091730 Key situation of HELP
LEFT 3100111730 Key situation of LEFT
LOC/REM 31000A1730 Key situation of LOC/REM
MEN/MIMIC 31000B1730 Key situation of MEN/MIMIC
OPEN 31000C1730 Key situation of OPEN
RIGHT 3100121730 Key situation of RIGHT
UP 3100101730 Key situation of UP
- 374 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
LED (Function ID: 201B01)

ERROR 3100021001 Error LED
IN SERV 3100011001 In service LED
LED-11 31000B1001 LED-11(Programmable)
LED-12 31000C1001 LED-12(Programmable)
LED-13 31000D1001 LED-13(Programmable)
LED-14 31000E1001 LED-14(Programmable)
LED-15 31000F1001 LED-15(Programmable)
LED-F1 31001B1001 Function-1 LED
LED-F2 31001C1001 Function-2 LED
LED-F3 31001D1001 Function-3 LED
LED-F4 31001E1001 Function-4 LED
LED-F5 31001F1001 Function-5 LED
LED-F6 3100201001 Function-6 LED
LED-F7 3100211001 Function-7 LED
LOC LED 3100251001 Local
REM LED 3100261001 Remote
TEST-A 3100221001 TEST-A
TEST-B 3100231001 TEST-B
TEST-C 3100241001 TEST-C

LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
LRSW01_LR_ST 3109001001 S43BCU state
- 375 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
MDCTRL01_EC_OWS 8013011D55 MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
MDCTRL01_EC_RCC 8013011D56 MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
MDCTRL01_EC_RMT 8013011D57 MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
MDCTRL01_SC_OWS 8013011D51 MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
MDCTRL01_SC_RCC 8013011D52 MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
MDCTRL01_SC_RMT 8013011D53 MDCTRL01 select command by Remote

MNT_LOGIC (Function ID: 220001)
ACT_TIME 3211001001 System active time in minutes
ALLALRM 3110101001 All alarm
ALRM_CND 3110131001 Alarm condition
BO_LCK 3110021001 BO lock
COM_LCK 3110031001 Tele-protection lock
ERROR_LED 3010011001 Error led
ERR_LV1 3110201001 Error level1
INSRV_LED 3010001001 In service led
LCK_STA 3110501001 Supervisor locked
MINR_ERR 3110121001 Minor error
SERI_ERR 3110111001 Serious error

NETMONITOR 3121001001 Change to Network monitoring function
PING_IP1 3120001460 PING1 response judging result of an IP address
PING_IP11 31200A1460 PING11 response judging result of an IP address
PING_IP12 31200B1460 PING12 response judging result of an IP address
- 376 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)


PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)
PMX3_0_0 8810001BB0
PMX3_0_1 8910001BB1
PMX3_0_2 8A10001BB2
PMX3_0_3 8B10001BB3
PMX3_0_4 8C10001BB4
PMX3_0_5 8D10001BB5
PMX3_0_6 8E10001BB6
PMX3_0_7 8F10001BB7
PMX3_10_0 8810051BB0
PMX3_10_1 8910051BB1
PMX3_10_2 8A10051BB2
PMX3_10_3 8B10051BB3
PMX3_10_4 8C10051BB4
PMX3_10_5 8D10051BB5
PMX3_10_6 8E10051BB6
PMX3_10_7 8F10051BB7
PMX3_11_0 8010051BB8
PMX3_11_1 8110051BB9
PMX3_11_2 8210051BBA
PMX3_11_3 8310051BBB
PMX3_11_4 8410051BBC
PMX3_11_5 8510051BBD
PMX3_11_6 8610051BBE
PMX3_11_7 8710051BBF
PMX3_12_0 8810061BB0
PMX3_12_1 8910061BB1
PMX3_12_2 8A10061BB2
PMX3_12_3 8B10061BB3
PMX3_12_4 8C10061BB4
PMX3_12_5 8D10061BB5
PMX3_12_6 8E10061BB6
PMX3_12_7 8F10061BB7
PMX3_13_0 8010061BB8
PMX3_13_1 8110061BB9
PMX3_13_2 8210061BBA
- 377 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

PMX3_13_3 8310061BBB
PMX3_13_4 8410061BBC
PMX3_13_5 8510061BBD
PMX3_13_6 8610061BBE
PMX3_13_7 8710061BBF
PMX3_14_0 8810071BB0
PMX3_14_1 8910071BB1
PMX3_14_2 8A10071BB2
PMX3_14_3 8B10071BB3
PMX3_14_4 8C10071BB4
PMX3_14_5 8D10071BB5
PMX3_14_6 8E10071BB6
PMX3_14_7 8F10071BB7
PMX3_15_0 8010071BB8
PMX3_15_1 8110071BB9
PMX3_15_2 8210071BBA
PMX3_15_3 8310071BBB
PMX3_15_4 8410071BBC
PMX3_15_5 8510071BBD
PMX3_15_6 8610071BBE
PMX3_15_7 8710071BBF
PMX3_1_0 8010001BB8
PMX3_1_1 8110001BB9
PMX3_1_2 8210001BBA
PMX3_1_3 8310001BBB
PMX3_1_4 8410001BBC
PMX3_1_5 8510001BBD
PMX3_1_6 8610001BBE
PMX3_1_7 8710001BBF
PMX3_2_0 8810011BB0
PMX3_2_1 8910011BB1
PMX3_2_2 8A10011BB2
PMX3_2_3 8B10011BB3
PMX3_2_4 8C10011BB4
PMX3_2_5 8D10011BB5
PMX3_2_6 8E10011BB6
PMX3_2_7 8F10011BB7
PMX3_3_0 8010011BB8
PMX3_3_1 8110011BB9
PMX3_3_2 8210011BBA
PMX3_3_3 8310011BBB
PMX3_3_4 8410011BBC
- 378 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

PMX3_3_5 8510011BBD
PMX3_3_6 8610011BBE
PMX3_3_7 8710011BBF
PMX3_4_0 8810021BB0
PMX3_4_1 8910021BB1
PMX3_4_2 8A10021BB2
PMX3_4_3 8B10021BB3
PMX3_4_4 8C10021BB4
PMX3_4_5 8D10021BB5
PMX3_4_6 8E10021BB6
PMX3_4_7 8F10021BB7
PMX3_5_0 8010021BB8
PMX3_5_1 8110021BB9
PMX3_5_2 8210021BBA
PMX3_5_3 8310021BBB
PMX3_5_4 8410021BBC
PMX3_5_5 8510021BBD
PMX3_5_6 8610021BBE
PMX3_5_7 8710021BBF
PMX3_6_0 8810031BB0
PMX3_6_1 8910031BB1
PMX3_6_2 8A10031BB2
PMX3_6_3 8B10031BB3
PMX3_6_4 8C10031BB4
PMX3_6_5 8D10031BB5
PMX3_6_6 8E10031BB6
PMX3_6_7 8F10031BB7
PMX3_7_0 8010031BB8
PMX3_7_1 8110031BB9
PMX3_7_2 8210031BBA
PMX3_7_3 8310031BBB
PMX3_7_4 8410031BBC
PMX3_7_5 8510031BBD
PMX3_7_6 8610031BBE
PMX3_7_7 8710031BBF
PMX3_8_0 8810041BB0
PMX3_8_1 8910041BB1
PMX3_8_2 8A10041BB2
PMX3_8_3 8B10041BB3
PMX3_8_4 8C10041BB4
PMX3_8_5 8D10041BB5
PMX3_8_6 8E10041BB6
- 379 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)

PMX3_8_7 8F10041BB7
PMX3_9_0 8010041BB8
PMX3_9_1 8110041BB9
PMX3_9_2 8210041BBA
PMX3_9_3 8310041BBB
PMX3_9_4 8410041BBC
PMX3_9_5 8510041BBD
PMX3_9_6 8610041BBE
PMX3_9_7 8710041BBF

SETTING_PF (Function ID: 201400)
ACT_GRP 3200001001
COM_CHG 3010011001
CTRL_CHG 3010031001
PRO_CHG 3010021001
SYS_CHG 3010001001
- 380 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 2 Case outline
- 381 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1/3 case size

1. Trihedral figure (1/3×19 inch)
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter
- 382 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
2. Panel cut out figure (1/3×19 inch)
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter
- 383 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection
- 384 -
[IO#1] [VCT#1]
1／3 case size T2 T1 VC1

PWS1 A BIO1 A C11 VCT34B
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1
2 BI1 2
VL1
(-) 2
4
(+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 VL2
(-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5
BI3 6
VL3
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 C12
BI4
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9
9
BI5
(-) 10 Ia
10
(+) 11
11
BI6
(-) 12 Ib
12
(+) 13
13
BI7
Ic
(-) 14
C13 14
15 15
BO1(SF) Ie’ / 3I0
16
16
17 17
BO2(SF) Ie’ / 3I0
18
18
21
BO3(SF)
22
23
BO4(SF)
24 C14
25
BO5(SF)
26
27
BO6(SF)
28
(+) 29
29
30
DC/DC BO7
30
(-) 31
32 BO8
31
C15
IRIG-B000 20
•A1
32
35
33 •B1• SIG
•B2
36 A2 DISUSE
BO9
34
37
35
• DISUSE
38
37 •A3
36
•B3• GND
BO10
38
●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●E
*Note: Short-link is made by the manufacture
- 385 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS and PICS
- 386 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the
IEC 61850 interface in GR series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models
conformance statement”.
- 387 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client/ Server/ IED Remarks

subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
- 388 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
- 389 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O Y
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
- 390 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘ M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log C ontrol, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
- 391 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
- 392 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateRequest IED
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling m m m m Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initRequestDetail m m m m Y
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateResponse IED
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled m m m m Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initResponseDetail m m m m Y
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
- 393 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
MMS service supported conformance table

Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB IED
status o o o m Y
getNameList o o o c1 Y
identify o o m m Y
rename o o o o N
read o o o c2 Y
write o o o c3 Y
getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y
defineNamedVariable o o o o N
defineScatteredAccess o i o i N
getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N
deleteVariableAccess o o o o N
defineNamedVariableList o o o o N
getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y
deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N
defineNamedType o i o i N
getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N
deleteNamedType o i o i N
input o i o i N
output o i o i N
takeControl o i o i N
relinquishControl o i o i N
defineSemaphore o i o i N
deleteSemaphore o i o i N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N
downloadSegment o i o i N
terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N
initiateUploadSequence o i o i N
uploadSegment o i o i N
terminateUploadSequence o i o i N
requestDomainDownload o i o i N
requestDomainUpload o i o i N
loadDomainContent o i o i N
storeDomainContent o i o i N
deleteDomain o i o i N
getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y
createProgramInvocation o i o i N
- 394 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client-CR Server-CR
deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m Y
cancel o o o m Y
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N
- 395 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client-CR Server-CR
defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
MMS Parameter CBB

Client-CR Server-CR
MMS parameter CBB IED
STR1 o o o c1 Y
STR2 o o o o N
1 1 or 1 c2 Y(10
gre )
NEST ater
VNAM o o o c1 Y
VADR o o o o N
VALT o o o c1 Y
bit x x x x N
TPY o o o o N
VLIS o c1 o c3 Y
bit x x x x N
bit x x x x N
CEI o i o i N
ACO o c4 o c4 N
SEM o c4 o c4 N
CSR o c4 o c4 N
CSNC o c4 o c4 N
CSPLC o c4 o c4 N
CSPI o c4 o c4 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.
c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.
- 396 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GetNameList conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNameList IED
Request
ObjectClass m m m m Y
ObjectScope m m m m Y
DomainName o o m m Y
ContinueAfter o m m m Y
Response+
List Of Identifier m m m m Y
MoreFollows m m m m Y
Response-
Error Type m m m m Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.
AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.
VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification IED
listOfVariable o o o c1 Y
variableSpecification o o o c1 Y
alternateAccess o o o c1 Y
variableListName o o o c2 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.
VariableSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableSpecification IED
name o o o m Y
address o o o i N
variableDescription o o o i N
scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N
invalidated o x o x N
- 397 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Read conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Read IED
Request
specificationWithResult o o o m Y
variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y
Response
variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y
listOfAccessResult m m m m Y
Write conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Write IED
Request
listOfData m m m m Y
Response
failure m m m m Y
success m m m m Y
InformationReport conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
InformationReport IED
Request
GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes IED
Request
name o o m m Y
address o o m x N
Response
mmsDeletable m m m m Y
address o x o x N
typeSpecification m m m m Y
DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
- 398 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes IED
Request
ObjectName m m m m Y
Response
listOfVariable m m m m Y
variableSpecification m m m m Y
alternateAccess o m o i N
DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement

Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
FileDirectory conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileDirectory IED
Request
filespecification o o m m Y
continueAfter o o m m Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y
- 399 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
FileOpen conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileOpen IED
Request
filename m m m m Y
initialPosition o o m m Y
Response+
frsmID m m m m Y
fileAttributes m m m m Y
FileRead conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileRead IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+
fileData m m m m Y
- 400 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
FileClose conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileClose IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+ m m m m Y
GOOSE conformance statement

Subscriber Publisher Value/comment IED
GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y
SendGOOSEMessage m m Y
GetGoReference o c3 N
GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N
GetGoCBValues o o Y
SetGoCBValues o o Y
GSENotSupported c2 c5 N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.
- 401 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of
the IEC 61850 interface in GR series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models
conformance statement”.
- 402 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client/ Server/ IED Remarks

subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B24 SCSM: other -
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
- 403 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
M15 Unicast SVC O O N

M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O Y
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
- 404 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
- 405 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
PICS for A-Profile support

shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
- 406 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateRequest IED
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling m m m m Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initRequestDetail m m m m Y
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateResponse IED
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled m m m m Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y
initResponseDetail m m m m Y
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
- 407 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
MMS service supported conformance table

Client-CR Server-CR
status o o o m Y
getNameList o o o c1 Y
identify o o m m Y
rename o o o o N
read o o o c2 Y
write o o o c3 Y
getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y
defineNamedVariable o o o o N
defineScatteredAccess o i o i N
getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N
deleteVariableAccess o o o o N
defineNamedVariableList o o o o N
getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y
deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N
defineNamedType o i o i N
getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N
deleteNamedType o i o i N
input o i o i N
output o i o i N
takeControl o i o i N
relinquishControl o i o i N
defineSemaphore o i o i N
deleteSemaphore o i o i N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N
initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N
downloadSegment o i o i N
terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N
initiateUploadSequence o i o i N
uploadSegment o i o i N
terminateUploadSequence o i o i N
requestDomainDownload o i o i N
requestDomainUpload o i o i N
loadDomainContent o i o i N
storeDomainContent o i o i N
deleteDomain o i o i N
getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y
createProgramInvocation o i o i N
- 408 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client-CR Server-CR
deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m Y
cancel o o o m Y
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N
- 409 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Client-CR Server-CR
defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
MMS Parameter CBB

Client-CR Server-CR
MMS parameter CBB IED
STR1 o o o c1 Y
STR2 o o o o N
1 1 or 1 c2 Y(10
gre )
NEST ater
VNAM o o o c1 Y
VADR o o o o N
VALT o o o c1 Y
bit x x x x N
TPY o o o o N
VLIS o c1 o c3 Y
bit x x x x N
bit x x x x N
CEI o i o i N
ACO o c4 o c4 N
SEM o c4 o c4 N
CSR o c4 o c4 N
CSNC o c4 o c4 N
CSPLC o c4 o c4 N
CSPI o c4 o c4 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.
c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.
- 410 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GetNameList conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNameList IED
Request
ObjectClass m m m m Y
ObjectScope m m m m Y
DomainName o o m m Y
ContinueAfter o m m m Y
Response+
List Of Identifier m m m m Y
Response-
Error Type m m m m Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.
AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.
VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification IED
listOfVariable o o o c1 Y
variableSpecification o o o c1 Y
alternateAccess o o o c1 Y
variableListName o o o c2 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.
VariableSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
VariableSpecification IED
name o o o m Y
address o o o i N
variableDescription o o o i N
scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N
invalidated o x o x N
Read conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Read IED
Request
specificationWithResult o o o m Y
Response
variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y
- 411 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Write conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
Write IED
Request
listOfData m m m m Y
Response
failure m m m m Y
success m m m m Y
InformationReport conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
InformationReport IED
Request
GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes IED
Request
name o o m m Y
address o o m x N
Response
address o x o x N
typeSpecification m m m m Y
DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes IED
Request
ObjectName m m m m Y
Response
listOfVariable m m m m Y
variableSpecification m m m m Y
alternateAccess o m o i N
DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.
- 412 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement

Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.
FileDirectory conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileDirectory IED
Request
filespecification o o m m Y
continueAfter o o m m Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y
FileOpen conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileOpen IED
Request
filename m m m m Y
initialPosition o o m m Y
Response+
frsmID m m m m Y
fileAttributes m m m m Y
FileRead conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileRead IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+
fileData m m m m Y
- 413 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
FileClose conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR
FileClose IED
Request
frsmID m m m m Y
Response+ m m m m Y
GOOSE conformance statement

Subscriber Publisher Value/comment IED
GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y
SendGOOSEMessage m m Y
GetGoReference o c3 N
GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N
GetGoCBValues o o Y
SetGoCBValues o o Y
GSENotSupported c2 c5 N
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.
- 414 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
- 415 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
IEC61850 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GR-Series(GRD200)
Ver.0.1
- 416 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
The GRD200 with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version upper than E(G2M850-01-E) supports
IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes GRD200 Nodes GRD200
L: System Logical Nodes GGIO_GOOSE Yes
LPHD Yes GSAL ---
Common Logical Node Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
LLN0 Yes IARC ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions IHMI ---
PDIF --- ITCI ---
PDIR --- ITMI ---
PDIS --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDOP --- ANCR ---
PDUP --- ARCO ---
PFRC --- ATCC ---
PHAR --- AVCO ---
PHIZ --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PIOC --- MDIF ---
PMRI --- MHAI ---
PMSS --- MHAN ---
POPE --- MMTR ---
PPAM --- MMXN ---
PSCH --- MMXU Yes
PSDE --- MSQI Yes
PTEF --- MSTA ---
PTOC --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOF --- SARC ---
PTOV --- SIMG ---
PTRC --- SIML ---
PTTR --- SPDC ---
PTUC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUV --- XCBR ---
PUPF --- XSWI ---
PTUF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PVOC --- TCTR ---
PVPH --- TVTR ---
PZSU --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YEFN ---
RDRE --- YLTC ---
RADR --- YPSH ---
RBDR --- YPTR ---
RDRS --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system
RBRF Yes equipment
RDIR --- ZAXN ---
RFLO --- ZBAT ---
RPSB --- ZCAB ---
RREC --- ZCAP ---
RSYN --- ZCON ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZGEN ---
CALH --- ZGIL ---
CCGR --- ZLIN ---
CILO --- ZMOT ---
CPOW --- ZREA ---
CSWI --- ZRRC ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZSAR ---
GAPC --- ZTCF ---
GGIO Yes ZTCR ---
- 417 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRD200
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT ---
ACT_ABC Yes
ACD ---
ACD_ABC Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV ---
CMV ---
SAV ---
WYE ---
WYE_ABCN Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC ---
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
- 418 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD200
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and 419pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
- 419 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
RBRF class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start, timer running O Y
OpEx ACT Breaker failure trip (“external trip”) T C N
OpIn ACT_ABC Operate, retrip (“internal trip”) T C Y
Setting
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both,
FailMod ING O Y
other)
FailTmms ING Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip O Y
SPlTrTmms ING Single Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
TPTrTmms ING Three Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
DetValA ASG Current Detector Value O Y
ReTrMod ING Retrip Mode O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
- 420 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
GGIO_GOOSE class
Data
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
- 421 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O N
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O N
PhV WYE_ABCN Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O N
A WYE_ABCN Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C N
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
- 422 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD200
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
- 423 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
ACT_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACD_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
- 424 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
WYE_ABCN class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B |C |… O N
Services
- 425 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
Q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
T TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
- 426 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
- 427 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
- 428 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
- 429 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 5 Ordering
- 430 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Ordering information
[Hardware selection]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
Configurations G R D 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - - 0
Application of power system

Function for current element protection(CTx5 for 1/3 1
rack)
Function for voltage element protection(VTx5 for 1/3 2
rack)
Function for current and voltage element protection 3
(CTx5,VTx3 for 1/3 rack)
Function for current and voltage element protection 4
(CTx6,VTx5 for 1/2, 3/4 or 1/1 racks)
System frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
AC rating for phase currents
N/A (when code “7” = 2) 0
1A 1
5A 2
DC Rating
110-250 Vdc or 100-220Vac 1
48-110 Vdc 2
24- 48 Vdc 3
- 431 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
Outline
Standard LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 1
Standard LCD, 1/1 x 19’’ rack for flush/rack mounting 4
Large LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for flush mounting 5
Large LCD, 1/1 x 19’’ rack for flush/rack mounting 8
Separate Large LCD, 1/3 rack for flush mounting A
Separate Large LCD, 1/2 rack for flush mounting B
Separate Large LCD, 3/4 rack for flush mounting C
Separate Large LCD, 1/1 rack for flush/rack mounting D
Standard LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting E
Standard LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting F
Standard LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting G
Large LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting H
Large LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting J
Large LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for rack mounting K
Standard LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting L
Standard LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting M
Standard LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting N
Standard LCD, 1/1 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting P
Large LCD, 1/3 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting Q
Large LCD, 1/2 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting R
Large LCD, 3/4 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting S
Large LCD, 1/1 x 19’’ rack for vertical flush mounting T
BI/BO Module
Refer to Number of BI/BO Table
BI/BO Terminal Type
Compression plug type terminal 0
Ring lug type terminal 1
- 432 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication and/or Time Synch Port(s)

1CH 1
1CH + IRIG-B 3
2CH 4
2CH + IRIG-B 6
3CH 7
3CH + IRIG-B 9
1CH + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) B
1CH + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) D
2CH + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) E
2CH + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) G
3CH + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) H
3CH + IRIG-B + connection terminal for external I/O unit (GIO200) K
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication Port(s)
100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 and B – D) 3

100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 and B – D) 4
100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) 5
100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) 6
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) A
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) B
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) C
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) D
Fiber optic (for serial) x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) E
Fiber optic (for serial) x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) F
Fiber optic (for serial) x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 and E – G) G
Fiber optic (for serial) x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 and H – K) H
Function Block (linked with software selection)
See function table of software selection
Please contact with our sales staffs when you require user configurable models that are not indicated in the ordering sheet above.
- 433 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
[Selection of Binary IO module]

Number of BI/BO Ordering
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable) Configuration
“A” to
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
7 - - - - 6 4 - - 11 1xBIO1
12 - - - - 3 2 - - 12 1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 - 2 - - 13 1xBIO3
- 6 - - - - 2 6 - 14 1xBIO4
18 - - - - - - - - 15 1xBI1
- 12 - - - - - - - 16 1xBI2
- - 32 - - - - - - 17 1xBI3
Other Configuration ZZ To be specified at ordering
BI/BO 2 x I/O module (Set code position “9” to other than “1”, “5”, “A”, “E”, “H”, “L” and “Q”)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
“A” to Configuration
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
- - 32 - - 6 12 - - 21 1xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 32 - - 6 4 - - 22 1xBI3+1xBIO1
12 - 32 - - 3 2 - - 23 1xBI3+1xBIO2
18 - - - - 6 12 - - 24 1xBI1+1xBO1
25 - - - - 6 4 - - 25 1xBI1+1xBIO1
30 - - - - 3 2 - - 26 1xBI1+1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 6 14 - - 27 1xBO1+1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 6 6 - - 28 1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 12 16 - - 29 1xBO1+1xBIO1
16 12 4 2A 2xBIO3
- 434 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
BI/BO 3 x I/O module (Set code position “9” to other than “1”, “5”, “A”, “E”, “H”, “L” and “Q”)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable) “A” to Configuration
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
15 - - - 6 12 18 - - 31 1xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
20 - - - 6 9 16 - - 32 1xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
23 - - - 12 6 8 - - 33 1xBIO1+2xBIO3
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 34 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 6 14 - - 35 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
24 - - - 18 - 6 - - 36 3xBIO3
25 - - - - 12 16 - - 37 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 10 - 6 12 - - 38 1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - - - 6 12 - - 39 2xBI1+1xBO1
- 24 - - - 6 12 - - 3A 2xBI2+1xBO1
18 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 3B 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
7 - 32 - - 6 4 16 - 3C 1xBI3+1xBIO1+1xBO2
7 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 3D 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 - - 6 12 16 - 3E 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBO2
18 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 3F 1xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
16 - - - 12 6 16 - - 3G 1xBO1+2xBIO3
- 6 32 - - 6 14 6 - 3H 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO4
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 3J 1xBO1+1xBIO3+1xBI1
- - 62 - - 6 12 - - 3K 2xBI3+1xBO1
BI/BO 4 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “3”, “4”, “7”, “8”, “C”, “D”, “G”, “K”, “N”, “P”, “S” or “T”)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 41 1xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
32 - - - 24 - 8 - - 42 4xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 12 26 - - 43 1xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 12 24 - - 44 2xBI3+2xBO1
8 - 32 10 6 6 14 - - 45 1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1+1xBIO3
54 - - - - 6 12 - - 46 3xBI1+1xBO1
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 47 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 48 1xBO1+1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
20 6 15 28 49 2xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 6 12 - - 4A 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
34 - - - 12 6 16 - - 4B 1xBI1+1xBO1+2xBIO3
- 435 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
1xBI1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3+
33 - - - 6 6 6 32 - 51
2xBO2
44 - - - 6 12 26 - - 52 2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
25 - 96 - - 6 4 - - 53 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 - 96 - 6 6 14 - - 54 3xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 12 24 - - 55 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
62 - - - 6 6 14 - - 56 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
54 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 57 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
54 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 58 3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - 10 - 12 24 - - 59 2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 5A +1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 96 - - 12 24 - - 5B 3xBI3+2xBO1
- - 96 10 - 6 12 - - 5C 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1

No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO1
51 - - - 6 18 30 - - 61 +1xBIO3
8 - 96 - 6 12 26 - - 62 3xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 - - 12 24 - - 63 4xBI3+2xBO1
8 - 128 - 6 6 14 - - 64 4xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 96 10 6 6 14 - - 65
+1xBIO3
3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
54 6 - 10 - 6 14 6 - 66 +1xBIO4
- - 128 10 - 6 12 - - 67 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 68 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
52 - - - 12 - 4 32 - 69 2xBI1+2xBIO3+2xBO2
52 - - - 12 12 28 - - 6A 2xBI1+2xBO1+2xBIO3
36 - - - - 24 48 - - 6B 2xBI1+4xBO1
36 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 6C 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xBO1
- 436 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
BI/BO 7 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “4”, “8”, “D”, “P” or “T”)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable) Configuration
“A” to
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
80 - - - 6 12 26 - - 71 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
72 6 - - - 12 26 6 - 72 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO4
8 - 96 - 6 18 38 - - 73 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- 6 96 - - 18 38 6 - 74 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO4
36 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 75 2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO4+2xBO2
- - 96 20 - 12 24 - - 76 3xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
7 - 64 20 - 6 4 32 - 77 2xBI3+2xDCAI2+1xBIO1+2xBO2
- 60 - - - 6 12 16 - 78 5xBI2+1xBO1+1xBO2
- - 160 - - 12 24 - - 79 5xBI3+2xBO1
2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO3
52 - - 10 12 12 28 - - 7A
+2XBO1
54 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 7B 3xBI1 + 2xBI3 + 2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 7C 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
- - 128 - - 18 36 - - 7D 4xBI3+3xBO1
BI/BO 8 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “4”, “8”, “D”, “P” or “T”)
No.
(Position
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Hybrid BO
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BI
BI
- - 128 10 - 18 36 - - 81 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO1
54 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 82 3xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO4+2xBO2
- - 160 - - 18 36 - - 83 5xBI3+3xBO1
- - 160 20 - 6 12 - - 84 5xBI3+2xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 192 10 - 6 12 - - 85 6xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 24 48 - - 86 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+4xBO1
- 60 - - - 6 12 32 - 87 5xBI2+1xBO1+2xBO2
8 - 128 - 6 18 38 - - 88 4xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
14 - 96 30 - 12 8 - - 89 3xBI3+3xDCAI2+2xBIO1
- - 128 20 - 12 24 - - 8A 4xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
- - 192 20 - - - - - 8B 6xBI3+2xDCAI2
- - 256 - - - - - - 8C 8xBI3
36 - 64 20 - 12 24 - - 8D 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 18 36 - - 8E 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO1

Please contact with our sales staffs when you require “other configuration (number: ZZ)” that is not indicated in
the ordering sheet above.
- 437 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
[Selection of Function block, Communication, Protocol, and others]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R D 2 0 0 - 0 - -
Application of power system

Assignment on position “7”
Function Block
Refer to Function Table
Communication for Remote / Time Synch. (1)
Assignment on position “E”
Communication for Remote / Time Synch. (2)
Assignment on position “F”
Protocol
Standard (IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus) 0
Standard + IEC 61850 1
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment on position “9”
Language
English E
Note: Software selection codes “1” to “7”, “E”, “F” and “9” are common with hardware
selection codes.
- 438 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Ordering information (9/)

[Function block]
Ordering No. (Position “G&T”)
Function & Description 10 11 12 13 14
[VCT module and rack size]
Code “7” = 1 5 x CT (VCT module No.32) and 1/3 x 19” ● ● ●
Code “7” = 2 5 x VT (VCT module No.33) and 1/3 x 19” ● ●
Code “7” = 3 5 x CT + 3 x VT (VCT module No.34) and 1/3 x 19”
Code “7” = 4 6 x CT + 5 x VT (VCT module No.31) and 1/2, 3/4 or 1/1 x 19”
[Protection]
50/51 Non-directional phase overcurrent protection (4 steps) ● ● ●
50N/51N Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection (4 steps) ● ● ●
50/67,51/67 Non-directional / directional phase overcurrent protection
(4 steps)
50N/67N,51N/67N Non-directional / directional earth fault overcurrent protection
(4 steps)
ICD Inrush current (2nd harmonic) detection function ● ● ●
50N/51N Non-directional / directional sensitive overcurrent protection (4
● ●
steps)
51N/67N Directional sensitive earthfault protection (4 steps)
50BF Circuit breaker failure protection (2 stages) ● ● ●
37 Phase under-current protection (2 steps) ● ● ●
46 Negative sequence phase over-current protection (2 steps) ● ● ●
46/67 Non-Directional / directional negative sequence
phase over-current protection (4 steps)
49 Thermal overload protection ● ● ●
CLP Cold load protection function ● ●
46BC Broken conductor protection (1 step) ● ● ●
59 Phase over-voltage protection (4 steps) ● ●
59N Earth fault over-voltage protection (2 steps) ● ●
47 Negative sequence phase over-voltage protection (2 steps) ● ●
27 Phase under-voltage protection (4 steps) ● ●
80-50N/51N/67N Command protection by OC/EF and DOC/DEF schemes ● ●
81 Frequency protection (6 steps) ● ●
ROCOF Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) (6 steps) ● ●
32R Reverse power protection (2 steps)
51V Voltage controlled/restraint overcurrent (2 steps)
21FL Fault locator
[Control function]
79 Autoreclosing function (upto 4 shots) ● ● ●
25 Voltage check for autoreclosing / synchrocheck ● ●
Simple control Equipment control and interlock ● ●
Control Standard control function for bay control and monitoring
[Common]
TCS Trip circuit supervision ● ● ● ● ●
VTF VTF detection function ● ●
CTF CTF detection function
Event Event and alarm ● ● ● ● ●
[Misc.]
Measurement Measurement ● ● ● ● ●
PLC Programmable logic controller ● ● ● ● ●
Communication Remote communication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Simple control)
(Simple control)
OV/UV with 25
OV/UV with 25
(No control)
(No control)
(No control)
3OC+EF
3OC+EF
3OC+EF
●: Standard, ○: Equipped depending on the hardware configuration
- 439 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
[Function block]
Function & Description 15 16 17 18
Code “7” = 1 5 x CT (VCT module No.32) and 1/3 x 19”
Code “7” = 2 5 x VT (VCT module No.33) and 1/3 x 19”
Code “7” = 3 5 x CT + 3 x VT (VCT module No.34) and 1/3 x 19” ● ●
Code “7” = 4 6 x CT + 5 x VT (VCT module No.31) and 1/2, 3/4 or 1/1 x 19” ● ●
[Protection]
50/51 Non-directional phase overcurrent protection (4 steps)
50N/51N Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection (4 steps)
● ● ● ●
(4 steps)
● ● ● ●
(4 steps)
ICD Inrush current (2nd harmonic) detection function ● ● ● ●
steps)
51N/67N Directional sensitive earth fault protection (4 steps) ● ●
50BF Circuit breaker failure protection (2 stages) ● ● ● ●
37 Phase under-current protection (2 steps) ● ● ● ●
46 Negative sequence phase over-current protection (2 steps)
● ● ● ●
49 Thermal overload protection ● ● ● ●
CLP Cold load protection function ● ● ● ●
46BC Broken conductor protection (1 step) ● ● ● ●
59 Phase over-voltage protection (4 steps) ● ● ● ●
59N Earth fault over-voltage protection (2 steps) ● ● ● ●
47 Negative sequence phase over-voltage protection (2 steps) ● ● ● ●
27 Phase under-voltage protection (4 steps) ● ● ● ●
80-50N/51N/67N Command protection by OC/EF and DOC/DEF schemes ● ● ● ●
81 Frequency protection (6 steps) ● ● ● ●
ROCOF Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) (6 steps) ● ● ● ●
32R Reverse power protection (2 steps) ● ● ● ●
51V Voltage controlled/restraint overcurrent (2 steps) ● ● ● ●
21FL Fault locator ● ● ● ●
[Control function]
79 Autoreclosing function (upto 4 shots) ● ● ● ●
Control Standard control function for bay control and monitoring ●
[Common]
TCS Trip circuit supervision ● ● ● ●
VTF VTF detection function ● ● ● ●
CTF CTF detection function ● ● ● ●
Event Event and alarm ● ● ● ●
[Misc.]
Measurement Measurement ● ● ● ●
PLC Programmable logic controller ● ● ● ●
Communication Remote communication ○ ○ ○ ○
DOC+DEF with 25
DOC+DEF with 25
(Standard control)
(Simple control)
(Simple control)
(No control)
DOC+DEF
DOC+DEF
- 440 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
[Function block]
Function & Description 19 1C 1A 1B
Code “7” = 1 5 x CT (VCT module No.32) and 1/3 x 19” ●
Code “7” = 2 5 x VT (VCT module No.33) and 1/3 x 19” ●
Code “7” = 3 5 x CT + 3 x VT (VCT module No.34) and 1/3 x 19” ●
Code “7” = 4 6 x CT + 5 x VT (VCT module No.31) and 1/2, 3/4 or 1/1 x 19” ●
[Protection]
50/51 Non-directional phase overcurrent protection (4 steps)
50N/51N Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection (4 steps)
●
(4 steps)
●
(4 steps)
ICD Inrush current (2nd harmonic) detection function ●
steps)
51N/67N Directional sensitive earth fault protection (4 steps)
50BF Circuit breaker failure protection (2 stages) ● ● ●
37 Phase under-current protection (2 steps) ●
46 Negative sequence phase over-current protection (2 steps)
●
49 Thermal overload protection ●
CLP Cold load protection function ●
46BC Broken conductor protection (1 step) ●
59 Phase over-voltage protection (4 steps)
59N Earth fault over-voltage protection (2 steps)
47 Negative sequence phase over-voltage protection (2 steps)
27 Phase under-voltage protection (4 steps)
80-50N/51N/67N Command protection by OC/EF and DOC/DEF schemes ●
81 Frequency protection (6 steps)
ROCOF Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) (6 steps)
32R Reverse power protection (2 steps)
51V Voltage controlled/restraint overcurrent (2 steps) ●
21FL Fault locator ●
[Control function]
Autoreclosing function (upto 4 shots)
79
Autoreclosing function (1 Phase + 3Phase) ● ●
Control Standard control function for bay control and monitoring
[Common]
TCS Trip circuit supervision ● ●
VTF VTF detection function ● ●
CTF CTF detection function ● ●
Event Event and alarm ● ● ● ●
[Misc.]
Measurement Measurement ● ● ● ●
PLC Programmable logic controller ● ● ● ●
Communication Remote communication ○ ○ ○ ○
CBF+Autoreclosing with
CBF+Autoreclosing
25 (symple control)
Circuit breaker fail
Synchrocheck
protection
- 441 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
- 442 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 6 Technical data
- 443 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Technical data
HARDWARE
Analog Inputs
Rated current In 1A / 5A (selectable by user)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 mins
30 times rated current for 10 sec
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs ≤ 0.1VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs ≤ 0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc),
110/250Vdc or 100/220Vac (Operative range: 88 – 300Vdc
or 80 – 230Vac)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply ≤ 15%
Supply interruption ≤ 20ms at 110Vdc
Restart time < 5ms
Power consumption ≤ 15W (quiescent)
≤ 25W (maximum)
- 444 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Technical data
HARDWARE
Analog Inputs
Rated current In 1A / 5A (selectable by user)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz (selectable by user)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
30 times rated current for 10 sec
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs ≤ 0.1VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs ≤ 0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
110/250Vdc or 100/220Vac (Operative range: 88 – 300Vdc
or 80 – 230Vac)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply ≤ 15%
Supply interruption ≤ 20ms at 110Vdc
Restart time < 5ms
Power consumption ≤ 15W (quiescent)
≤ 25W (maximum)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Variable threshold settings are available for BI2 and BIO4
from 14V to 154V in various steps.
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged into
the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an external
resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
- 445 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 2 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
Operating time 4 ms
Auxiliary contacts
Operating time 9 ms
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
DC-AI (analog inputs)
Measurement range DC 0±1mA, 0±20mA, 4–20mA , 0–10mA, 0–20mA, ±10mA
DC –1 – 0 – +1V, –5 – 0 – +5V, –10 – 0 – +10V
Accuracy ±0.5% of full scale
Maximum permitted continuous current 2 times for maximum measurement range
Input resistance 250Ω(0 –±20mA), 3,000Ω(0±1mA )
DC-AO (analog outputs)
Measurement range DC 0 – ±20mA
DC 0 – ±10V
Accuracy ±1% of full scale
Measuring input capability
Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
- 446 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Function keys
Number 7
Local Interface
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2m (max.)
System Interface (rear port)
100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium Twisted pair cable, RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium 50/125 or 62.5/125µm fibre, SC connector
Protocol IEC61850 or DNP3 or Modbus® RTU
Serial communication (rear port)
RS485 Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 or Modbus® RTU
Fiber optical Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
Terminal Block
CT/VT input M3.5 Ring terminal
Binary input, Binary output M3.5 terminal with 15mm stripping length (for compression type
terminal)
M3.5 Ring terminal (for ring lug type terminal)
- 447 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC 60068-2-14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per IEC
60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and
earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals
and between all terminals and earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:

60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:

1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and
discharged into the input terminals with an
external resistance
- 448 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and
Electromagnetic 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 and 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
Radiated RF IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
Electromagnetic 25MHz to 1GHz.
Disturbance
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential
IEC 61000-4-5 modes:
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHz damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB
(mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
- 449 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Performance and Functional Standards
Category Standards
General
Common requirements IEC 60255-1
Data Exchange IEC 60255-24 / IEEE C37.111 (COMTRADE)
IEEE C37-239 (COMFEDE)
Product Safety IEC 60255-27
Functional
Synchronizing IEC 60255-125
Under/Over Voltage Protection IEC 60255-127
Under/Over Power Protection IEC 60255-132
Thermal Protection IEC 60255-149
Over/Under Current Protection IEC 60255-151
Directional Current Protection IEC 60255-167
Reclosing IEC 60255-179
Frequency Protection IEC 60255-181
Teleprotection IEC 60255-185
European Commission Directives
2004/108/EC Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to generic EMC standards
EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4, and product
standard IEC 60255-26.
2006/95/EC Compliance with the European Commission Low
Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27.
- 450 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Functional data
PROTECTION
Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection
IDMTL Overcurrent threshold: 0.02 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.10 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
DTL Overcurrent threshold: 0.02 – 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
DO/PU ratio: 10 − 100% in 1% steps
Delay type: DT, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO2 STI, US CO8 I
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 50.000 in 0.001 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Reset Definite Delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Directional Characteristic Angle: 0° to 180° in 1° steps
Directional Earth Fault Protection
IDMTL Overcurrent threshold: 0.02 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
DTL Overcurrent threshold: 0.02 – 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Delay type: DT, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Directional Characteristic Angle: 0° to 180° in 1° steps
Directional Characteristic Polarising Voltage 0.5 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
threshold:
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Overcurrent threshold: 0.002 – 0.200A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)
Delay Type: DT, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time
Directional Characteristic angle: 0° to 180° in 1° steps
Directional Characteristic Boundary of ±87.5°
operation:
Directional Characteristic Voltage threshold: 0.5 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Residual power threshold: 0.00 – 20.00W in 0.05W (1A rating)
0.00 – 100.00W in 0.25W (5A rating)
- 451 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Overvoltage Protection
Overvoltage (OV) thresholds: 1.0 – 220.0V in 0.1V steps
OV delay type: DTL, IDMTL
OV IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 100.000 in 0.001 steps
OV DTL delay: 0.00 − 300.00s in 0.01s steps
st
1 OV Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection
Undervoltage (UV) thresholds: 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
UV delay type: DTL, IDMTL
UV IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 100.000 in 0.001 steps
UV DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
UV Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Under/Over Frequency Protection
Under/Over frequency threshold: -10.00 – +10.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps
Undervoltage block: 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Voltage Restraint Protection (51V)
Voltage threshold 10.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Sensitivity range 20 to 100% of voltage threshold
Thermal Overload Protection

Iθ = k.IFLC (Thermal setting): 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Time constant (τ): 0.5 - 500.0 mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm: 50 - 100% in 1% steps
Accuracy
IDMTL Overcurrent Pick-up: Setting value ± 2%
All Other Overcurrent Pick-ups: Setting value ± 5%
Overcurrent PU/DO ratio: ≥95%
Undercurrent Pick-up: Setting value ± 2%
Undercurrent PU/DO ratio: ≤105%
IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up: Setting value ± 2%
All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups: Setting value ± 5%
Inverse Time Delays: ± 5% or 30ms (1.5 to 30 times setting)
Definite Time Delays: ± 1% (for more than 50ms setting) or 10ms
Transient Overreach for instant. elements: < −5% for X/R = 100.
- 452 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Synchronism Check Function

Synchronism check angle: 0 – 75° in 1° steps
Frequency difference check: 0.01– 2.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps
Voltage difference check: 1.0 – 150.0V in 0.1V steps
Voltage dead check: 5 – 50V in 1V steps
Voltage live check: 10 – 100V in 1V steps
Metering Function
Current Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
Voltage Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
Power (P, Q) Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy ± 1.0% (at rating)
Frequency Accuracy ± 0.03Hz
GPS Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
- 453 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting
- 454 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
LED
Standard1(minimum protection)
LED No
Logic Attribute
Remarks
Label Fixed Color Blink Fixed
1 IN SERVICE x Green - x Lit when IED is in service.
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
4 TRIP Red Lit when trip command issued.
6 TEST Yellow Lit when test mode changed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
- 455 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
PF-Key
PF-Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Model
Fault Event Event Event
GRZ200 Metering ― ―
Record Record1 Record2 Record3
GRL200 Metering ― ―
Event Event Event
GBU200(BCU) Metering ― ― ―
Record1 Record2 Record3
GBU200(BCPU) Metering ― ―
Event Event Event
GBU200(IFU) Metering ― ― ―
Record1 Record2 Record3
GRG200 Metering ― ―
GRX200
- 456 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
Appendix 8 Methods of replacing modules
- 457 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
CAUTION When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed
wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of
the electronic components could suffer damage.
CAUTION After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the data related
the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
1). Switch off the DC power supply.

Warning: Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC
power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2). Remove the front panel cover.
3). Open the front panel.
Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side
of the front panel.
4). Detach the holding bar.

Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the bar.
- 458 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
5). Unplug the cables.

Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of
black connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the
connector.
6). Pull out the module.

Pull out the failure module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers (white).
× ✓
Details of the gray connector on modules (top side)
- 459 -
6F2S1891 (0.2)
7). Insert the replacement module.

Insert the replacement module into the same slots where marked up.
8). Do the No.5 to No.1 steps in reverse order.

CAUTION: Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original
positions and the ribbon cables are plugged in. If the ribbon cables are not
plugged in enough (especially the gray connectors), the module could suffer
damage.
- 460 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. Date Revised Section Contents
– Mar. 15, 2013 -- First issue
0.01 Apr. 23, 2013 Chapter 4 Revised for longitudinal terminals
Appendix External connection figures and ordering are
altered.
0.02 Oct. 19, 2013 Chapter 2 and 3 Function configuration revised
Chapter 4 Terminal structure revised
0.1 June 23, 2014 Chapter 4 and 9 Added explanation of “TCS” and “VCT ratio and
rated current setting”
0.2 Aug 4, 2014 Chapter 3 OCV function added

GRD200 (6F2S1891) 0.2 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GRD200 (6F2S1891) 0.2 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

6F2S1891 (0.

Multi Function Protection IED

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result

Liability, copyright and others

2.4.2 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 81

2.11.1 Computation principle ......................................................................................................... 115

3.2.2 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 169

4.5.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits ........................................................................................ 232

11.3 Record sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 286

1.1 Protection functions

[CBF] Circuit breaker fail protection

[L/R] Remote/Local control function

[LRST] Trip LED reset function

[MDCTRL] Mode control function

[GCNT] General pulse counter function

1.3 Monitoring and metering functions

Fault record function:

Event record function:

Disturbance record function:

1.4 Hardware overview

- 100BASE-FX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol

Module circuits and others:

1.5 Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID

Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID

(ii) Timer symbol

XXX - YYY Output

(iii) Logic symbol

(iv) Flip-flop symbol

(v) Scheme switch

1.7 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Data ID

2.1 Overcurrent protection (OC)

2.1.1 Relay polarity

(i) Characteristic of non-directional OC

Figure 2.1-1 Characteristic of non-directional OC1; each phase-current is

(ii) Characteristic of directional-OC element in the forward direction

Non-operation (No trip) zone

Operation (Trip) zone

Figure 2.1-2 Characteristic of the directional-OC element in the forward direction

A reference signal, that is, a polarization signal is required by the directional OC

Figure 2.1-3 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC∠90°)

Table 2.1-2 Directional polarizing signal

Phase difference calculation

Figure 2.1-4 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory

Vpol Vpol Vpol

θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°

Figure 2.1-5 Examples of sensing angle (θ)

(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

2.1.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic

(i) Operation principle

(i)-2 Definite time delay (independent time characteristic)

(ii) Independent time characteristic (definite time delay)

apply these settings are provided in sections (vi) and (vii).

(iii) Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)

(iv) Operate time of dependent time characteristic

Table 2.1-3 Constants for dependent operate time characteristics

Figure 2.1-6 Inverse Definite Mean Time (IDMT) Characteristics

(v) Operate time of independent time characteristic

(v)-1 Time characteristic

(v)-2 Instantaneous activation

(vi) Reset time for dependent time characteristic